(logo)
(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Project Gutenberg | Children's Library | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Additional Collections

Search: Advanced Search

Anonymous User (login or join us)Upload
See other formats

Full text of "Recent adventures in astronomy"

UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA 
AT LOS ANGELES 




THE GIFT OF 

MAY TREAT MORRISON 

IN MEMORY OF 

ALEXANDER F MORRISON 



Cbe Wfctorfan Era Series 



Recent Advances in Astronomy 



Recent Advances 



in 



Astronomy 

By 

ALFRED H. FISON, D.Sc. 




HERBERT S. STONE & COMPANY 
CHICAGO & NEW YORK 

M DCCC XCIX 



, 



Q641- 



Preface 



In the following pages I have endeavoured to 
give a simple account of some of the more interest- 
ing " Recent Advances in Astronomy". To har- 
monize with the general scheme of the series of which 
this work forms a volume, it was at first suggested 
that I should develop recent progress in Astronomy 
jf historically. The difficulties in the way of treating 
^ any branch of science in such a manner are, how- 
ever, very considerable ; especially when, as in the 
present instance, it is desired to present the subject 
in such a manner as to be readily followed by those 
who have but slight familiarity with its techni- 
calities. I am only acquainted with one entirely 
S satisfactory "History of Astronomy", and that one 
^ scarcely appeals to other than professional astro- 
^ nomers. It has upon the whole appeared best to 
<g effect a compromise between an historical and a 
purely descriptive method; and I have, therefore, 
o while dealing with what have appeared to me to 
be a few among the more interesting problems of 
modern Astronomy in a series of separate essays, 
followed in each the historical method as far as 
possible. It has been found practicable to adhere 
to this scheme more rigidly in the latter part of the 
work. 

429055 



vi Preface 

Every writer of a popular work on Astronomy, or 
any other branch of science, must become largely 
indebted to those who have devoted their labour 
to the compilation of works of reference; and I 
would acknowledge my deep obligation to the ex- 
tensive accumulation of accurate knowledge con- 
tained in Miss Clerke's two works A History of 
Astronomy during the Nineteenth Century, and The 
System of the Stars. 

A. H. FISON. 

September, 1898. 



Contents 



CHAPTER I 

Page 
The Life of a Star -------/ 

APPENDIX TO CHAPTER I 
The Measurement of Stellar Distances - - -JO 

CHAPTER II 
The Milky Way and the Distribution of Stars - -59 

CHAPTER III 
The Recent Study of Mars ------ roi 

CHAPTER IV 
The Analysis of Sunlight - - - - - 144. 

CHAPTER V 
The Analysis of Starlight 193 

CHAPTER VI 
The Red Flames of the Sun ------ 219 

INDEX 239 



Recent Advances in 
Astronomy. 

Ghapten J. v W |' j .. : j /,\ 
The Life of a Star. 

" Great is the mystery of Space, greater is the mystery of 
Time. Either mystery grows upon man, as man himself 
grows; and either seems to be a function of the godlike which 
is in man. In reality, the depths and the heights which are 
in man, the depths by which he searches, the heights by which 
he aspires, are but projected and made objective externally in 
the three dimensions of space which are outside of him." 

DE QUINCEY. 

With our present knowledge of the sun -like 
nature of the stars, and the colossal part that they 
play in the scheme of the physical universe, it ap- 
pears strange that, in spite of the bold spirit of 
speculation that characterized the ancient philo- 
sophy, a philosophy that recognized the possibility 
of the development of higher forms of life from 
lower ; that saw in the Sun, Moon, and Earth differ- 
ent forms of air in different stages of condensation ; 
and in the universe itself the working of a fortuitous 
concourse of atoms, no worthy speculation should 
have been recorded as to the nature of the stars. 

: ., I ( M 520 ) A 



2 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

Alike to the philosophers of Ancient Greece, and to 
the early astronomers of Greece and Alexandria 
whose lives were spent in tracing with deepest 
thought and rarest skill the movements of the 
heavenly bodies, it was sufficient that the stars were 
points of fire, each set in its place in the concave of 
the firmament, and eternally borne by it in diurnal 
revolution round the central Earth. 

It is unnecessary '.to jdc/plore than very briefly re- 
view the sfcps,. initiated in the* bold speculations of 
CoperoTeui>:'tb.wkrds':tha'. middle of the sixteenth 
century, by which our present knowledge of the 
sun-like nature of the stars has been attained. 
Copernicus had shown it to be probable that the 
Earth is one of the planets, a group of small bodies 
revolving, each in its own period or year, round the 
central Sun; and had recognized, as the logical 
consequence of his scheme, that to remain, as they 
appeared to remain, unaffected in their apparent 
positions upon the celestial vault during the sup- 
posed annual sweep of the Earth in its orbit, the 
stars must be vastly more remote than the Sun; 
but to him the material vault of heaven had merely 
been thrown farther back, and the stars were still 
points of fire studding its concave surface. The 
bolder and direct deduction that to appear un- 
affected in direction through all seasons of the year, 
in spite of the enormous displacement in the posi- 
tion of the observer upon the moving Earth, the 
stars must be so remote, that, to be visible at all, 
the majority of them must be bodies of the same 
order of light-giving power with the Sun itself was 



The Life of a Star. 



recognized, though with hesitation, by John Kepler, 
and was for the first time fully accepted by Galileo. 

It will be advisable to present the principle under- 
lying this deduction in a more definite form, since 
the thorough comprehension of what has already 
been achieved by it, and what may reasonably be 
expected from its application in the future, is of 
fundamental importance in the astronomy of the 
stars. It involves directly the only method that has 
so far been successfully 
applied to the measure- 
ment of the distance of 
a star. 

Let the curve in fig. 
i be regarded as repre- 
senting the orbit of the 
Earth round the Sun, 
an oblique view of the 
nearly circular orbit,and 
suppose that, the Earth 
being in the position in- 
dicated by the point P, 
a star is observed, and 

Fig. i. Illustrating Stellar Parallax. 

that the direction in 

which it is seen is recorded with all possible ac- 
curacy. Let the straight line PA indicate this 
direction. The star must lie somewhere in the 
direction PA, but there is nothing in the observation 
to indicate its distance from A, the point of observa- 
tion. Six months later, however, the Earth will 
have reached the position indicated by Q, having 
traversed in that time one-half of its complete orbit. 




4 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

Let the direction in which the star now appears be 
observed, and let it be recorded by the line QB. 
The star lies therefore in the direction QB, but there 
is nothing in the last observation to indicate its 
exact position in this direction. Since, however, 
the pair of observations have located the star in the 
directions PA and QB, it must be situated at s, their 
point of intersection, and the geometry of the figure 
at once gives the proportion between the distance 
of the star and the dimensions of the Earth's orbit. 

The principle of this, the only method by which 
the distance of a star has so far been determined, 
cannot but appear extremely simple, but a difficulty 
in the interpretation of its application appeared, 
when to Copernicus, as to his followers for nearly 
three hundred years, the lines of sight PA and QB 
appeared to be parallel, showing no tendency what- 
ever to meet. Thus, the first observation having 
established PA as the direction of the star, the second 
would give the parallel line QC, and not a direction 
such as QB, sensibly inclined to the first. 

Assuming the fact of the Earth's journey round 
the Sun, the only possible interpretation of the 
apparent parallelism of the lines of sight was that 
the stars are so remote that, although the direc- 
tions PA and QC are inclined toward each other, 
each being directed to the star, the inclination is 
so slight that it was incapable of detection. That 
this was the true explanation appeared more and 
more certain as the truth of the Copernican system 
became more firmly established; and in the con- 
viction that success was possible, and as instruments 



The Life of a Star. 5 

were devised by the employment of which it became 
possible to determine with an ever-increasing degree 
of accuracy the direction of a star, the search after 
the inclination of the lines of sight towards a star 
from opposite extremities of the Earth's orbit, or the 
"parallax of a star", became increasingly keen. 1 

It is a matter of history that after close upon three 
centuries of arduous toil toil occasionally rewarded 
by unexpected discoveries of the greatest interest 
and of the farthest-reaching importance, though 
resulting in failure so far as the immediate object 
of the search was concerned success was at last 
achieved. In 1838, Bessel of Konigsberg demon- 
strated, as the result of the critical examination of a 
great number of observations, that a certain small 
star in the constellation of the Swan did appear to 
experience a displacement in its position upon the 
heavens during the progress of the year, the inclina- 
tion of the lines of sight toward it from the two most 
favourably situated positions of the Earth in its orbit 
being estimated at nearly two-thirds of a second of 
arc. The star, in itself an insignificant member of 
the orbs of heaven, thus destined from its associa- 
tion with Bessel's discovery to acquire an honour- 
able place in the history of astronomy, is known as 
6 1 Cygni ; and its distance as deduced from Bessel's 
measurements was 600,000 times that of the Sun. 
Bessel's estimate has, however, been reduced by 

1 The parallax of a star is more exactly defined in astronomy as one-half 
of the greatest observable inclination of the lines of sight, or as the inclina- 
tion toward each other of two straight lines to the star, one directed from 
the Sun and the other from the Earth at a time when the direction of the 
Earth, as seen from the Sun, makes a right angle with that of the star. 



6 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

more recent measurements, carried out with finer 
instrumental appliances, and with the advantages 
arising from accumulated experience, to 440,00x5 
times the distance of the Sun. 

It would be scarcely advisable to digress here into 
a critical examination of the difficulties that have 
been experienced in the search after stellar parallax, 
and the methods by which they have been in part 
overcome; but the subject is of such high impor- 
tance in the astronomy of the stars that I have ven- 
tured to give, in the form of an appendix to the 
present chapter, a rather more detailed account of 
Bessel's discovery, as well as of the leading features 
of more recent work. 

Within a few months of the date of Bessel's dis- 
covery, Professor Henderson, of Edinburgh, an- 
nounced the fact of his having succeeded in detect- 
ing parallax in the bright southern star a Centauri. 
The observations in which the parallax of the star 
was recorded had been made by Henderson six 
years previously, and for a different purpose, during 
the course of his work at the Cape of Good Hope, 
and his attention was only redirected to them with 
a view to the investigation of parallax by the an- 
nouncement of Bessel's success. The distance of 
a Centauri, deduced from the parallax originally 
announced by Henderson, is 180,000 times that of 
the Sun, but the most recent measurements have 
extended it to 270,000 times the distance of the Sun. 

So far, no star has been found to lie nearer to the 
solar system than a Centauri. A vague suggestion 
of the unthinkable void that separates us from this, 



The Life of a Star. 7 

in all probability the nearest of the stars, may 
perhaps be obtained from the fact, that upon such 
a scale that the orbit of the earth should be repre- 
sented by the circumference of a shilling, the star 
would be removed to a distance of two miles. 
Across such a distance as that of a Centauri, light, 
travelling with a velocity of 187,000 miles in a 
second of time, would speed onward for four and a 
half years ; so that the star is seen, not as it is now, 
but as it was four and a half years since, while 
another equal period must pass before the rays now 
leaving it will bring their record to the shores of the 
Earth. 

The discoveries of Bessel and Henderson im- 
parted new life to the search after the parallaxes of 
stars. So delicate, however, are the necessary 
observations of direction, and so many and serious 
are the sources of error, that, excepting a few 
isolated successes, the record of the next forty 
years is chiefly one of accumulation of experience ; 
and when in 1881 Dr. Gill and Dr. Elkin com- 
menced a series of observations at the Cape of 
Good Hope, the parallaxes of not more than half 
a dozen stars had been detected with certainty. 
Since that date, however, parallax hunters have 
been better rewarded, though up to the present 
time it is doubtful whether success has been 
achieved in more than fifty instances. 

Of the stars the parallaxes of which have been 
detected, Sirius is undoubtedly the most important. 
As in the case of a Centauri, its parallax is indicated 
with some degree of probability in observations 



8 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

made by Henderson in 1832. For another half- 
century, however, the numerous attacks made upon 
it were chiefly remarkable for the discordance of 
their results, discordance that ultimately vanished 
in the frequently repeated observations that have 
been made at the Cape since 1891. The most 
recent estimate published by Gill in 1898 of a 
parallax of -37 of a second of arc, agrees very 
closely with his previous results, and indicates for 
the star a distance of 556,000 times that of the Sun. 

The mere statement of the distances of stars is 
apt to be productive of weariness of the spirit; in 
their absolute magnitudes they are entirely un- 
thinkable, but in their relation to things familiar, 
they may well produce a powerful impression of the 
nothingness of the Earth so far as its physical 
relations are concerned to the scheme of the 
physical universe. From the days of the Psalmist 
it has been customary to regard the heavens as 
inspiring a sense of deep humility in man, but 
whether Nature in her most sublime aspect would 
appeal to one who had not already learnt the lesson 
from communion with his fellows is doubtful. 

The chief interest of the distances of the stars in 
the present connection lies in the view to which they 
necessarily lead regarding the nature of the stars 
themselves. If it were removed to the distance of 
Sirius, the Sun itself would fade into insignificance, 
shining but as a star of the third magnitude, rather 
less conspicuously than the brighter ones that form 
the familiar W of Cassiopeia. Seventy-five such 
stars would be necessary to supply light equal to 



The Life of a Star. 9 

that received from Sirius; hence, in the intensity of 
its light radiations, Sirius exceeds the Sun 75 times. 
Of the few stars in which parallaxes have so far 
been detected, to appear with their actual luminosi- 
ties at their estimated distances, many must far 
exceed the Sun in light-giving power, while a few 
must surpass even Sirius itself. Others, however, 
and among them Bessel's star in the Swan, while 
undoubtedly suns, would appear but as modest 
specimens of their class if placed beside ours, and 
it is scarcely possible so far to decide whether our 
Sun reaches the average of splendour displayed by 
the suns of space, or whether he surpasses it. It 
will be seen in a later chapter that the sun-like 
nature of the stars is further indicated in the analysis 
of their light by the spectroscope. 

When, as is the case in the overwhelming ma- 
jority of instances, no parallax can be detected in a 
star, its distance is of course indeterminate, but it 
is possible to assign a minimum distance beyond 
which it must be situated, if the smallest angle of 
parallax that could escape detection is known. So 
much depends upon the skill of the observer, upon 
the position of the star in relation to others, and 
even upon its colour, that it is not possible to give 
any definite and general estimate of this maximum 
parallax. According to a recent statement of Dr. 
Gill, however, than whom undoubtedly there can 
be no higher authority, under favourable conditions 
a parallax of a fiftieth of a second of arc should not 
escape detection, one that corresponds to a distance 
of rather more than 10,000,000 of times that of the 



io Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

Sun. There is little doubt that but an insignificant 
fraction of the stellar host lie within this limit. 

To apostrophize upon the picture of the physical 
universe revealed by these discoveries is an old 
story. The concave vault of the Old Astronomy 
has dissolved, and has revealed, beyond, a scheme 
unthinkable in its vastness, and in its suns and 
systems of suns radiant with energy. There are 
few among us who have not experienced, as in our 
more emotional moments we have endeavoured to 
penetrate, however superficially, the inward mystery 
of so majestic a scheme, and one in which man plays 
apparently so humble a part, a sense of oppression. 
We have been overwhelmed with the sense of in- 
scrutable and immanent mystery; and we have 
been ready to exclaim with the pilgrim of German 
fable, "I will go no farther; for the spirit of man 
acheth with this infinity. Insufferable is the glory 
of God ! Let me lie down in the grave and hide me 
from the persecution of the Infinite, for end, I see, 
there is none!" 

The stars, then, are suns; and the life of a star is 
the life of a sun. Life is essentially a succession 
of changes, a passage through varying conditions 
of activity ; death is cessation of all activity. Are 
there grounds for regarding our sun as undergoing 
change? and if there are, what is the nature of that 
change? Are there indications that in time the 
activity of the Sun will cease? The Sun is clearly 
a hot body continually throwing off an enormous 
amount of heat into space by the process of radia- 
tion. Unless, therefore, by some undiscovered and 



The Life of a Star. n 

entirely unsuspected process an equivalent amount 
is supplied to it from some external source, it must 
be becoming continually poorer in its store of heat. 1 
In the remote past it must have contained far more, 
and in the distant future it will contain far less heat 
than it contains at the present time. Everything 
goes to support the straightforward view that the 
light of the Sun is the direct result of a vivid state 
of incandescence of its surface consequent upon the 
high temperature to which it is raised. As the Sun 
cools, a time must come when, unless some catas- 
trophe intervenes, its temperature will have fallen 
so much that its beams will have lost their present 
glory ; later, it will cease to glow ; and thereafter, 
as a dark star, a sad memorial of its present splen- 
dour, it will pursue its lifeless course through the 
ages. 

Attempts have been made to estimate the time 
that must elapse before the period of this Sun-death, 
but in our ignorance of the physical constitution of 
the Sun, and more especially of that of its interior, 
such estimates are affected by a very wide margin 
of uncertainty. There is, however, no doubt that 
the actual heat existing as such in the Sun forms 
but an insignificant fraction of its total store of 
radiation. Without doubt, the Sun is largely, if 
not almost wholly, gaseous: and since all gases, as 
also nearly all solids and liquids, expand with 

iA rather attractive speculation of Julius Mayer, vigorously supported for 
a time by Tyndall, sought to account for the maintenance of the solar 
radiation by heat developed from the destruction of motion of meteorites con- 
tinually falling into the Sun. It has, however, been shown that any heat that 
the Sun may possibly gain in this way must be quite negligible in quantity. 



i2 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

accession of heat and contract upon loss of it, the 
sun must be shrinking. Further, the interior of the 
Sun must be enormously compressed by the weight 
of superincumbent matter; and as shrinkage takes 
place it must become still more compressed. But 
the act of compression of a gas produces heat; 
hence heat is continually being generated in the 
Sun by the compression of its substance. Each 
step in the loss of heat, therefore, calls into exist- 
ence other heat; and this may partly, wholly, or 
even for a time more than compensate, for the loss. 
Subjecting these principles to mathematical expres- 
sion, Helmholtz has shown that the heat thus 
evolved by compression of the Sun consequent 
upon its shrinkage must be sufficient in amount 
to maintain it as a self-luminous body for many 
millions of years. It is unnecessary for our present 
purpose to attempt to arrive at a more definite 
estimate of the future of the life of the Sun. 

Returning to the present condition of its system, 
and from it projecting our thought backward into 
the past, we see the Sun richer and richer in heat 
during receding ages; becoming more perfectly 
gaseous the ultimate effect of accession of heat 
being to convert all things into the gaseous state 
while ever increasing in volume ; the planets one by 
one disappear in its expanding bulk; and there 
appears as the first stage of Sun-life a diffused body 
of gas, extending beyond the present limits of the 
planetary system, and containing latent in itself a 
store of energy that is through coming ages to 
maintain the vitality of worlds. 



The Life of a Star. 13 

The Sun, and, by the same process of reasoning, 
the stars, would thus appear to have originated in 
extended volumes of tenuous gas, and to be fated 
in the end to be degraded into cold inert masses. 
These conclusions being accepted, it would appear 
probable that both of these conditions would be at 
the present time represented among celestial bodies, 
for even upon the extreme assumption that all of 
them were created at the same time and in the 
same stage of development, it would follow that, 
since they differ enormously in mass, they would 
cool and therefore pass through their life stages 
at different rates. It becomes, therefore, of great 
interest to inquire whether there exist in celestial 
space extensive bodies of gas, and whether there 
exist dark stars. The answer is clear: astronomical 
observation has revealed both. 

There can be little doubt that the earliest stage of 
star-life is represented in, at any rate many of, the 
nebulas. The nebulas appear as faint clouds of 
light, and are distributed in thousands over the 
face of the heavens. The greater number are ex- 
cessively faint, their very detection demanding the 
aid of the highest optical power; while two only, 
and those just hovering upon the verge of vision, 
are visible to the eye upon the darkest and clearest 
nights. These are the glorious objects in the 
constellations of Andromeda and Orion, the one in 
Orion being the more impressive of the two. 

The Great Nebula of Orion is situated near the 
centre of a line of faint stars that trail southward 
from the middle of a line formed by the three 



i 4 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

bright ones that constitute the "belt" of the 
familiar winter constellation Orion. Visible to 
the naked eye under favourable conditions as a 

faint mist 

A single misty star, 
Which is the second in a line of stars 
That form a sword beneath a belt of three ; 

its cloudy nature clearly revealed in a hand tele- 
scope or a good field-glass ; when viewed through 
a telescope of large light-grasping power it becomes 
one of the most impressive of natural objects, 
though the vast extension of the heavens into 
which its wreaths are thrown, and the abundance 
of delicate detail permeating the whole, have only 
become revealed in recent records of the photo- 
graphic plate. 

The Nebula of Orion appears through a fine 
telescope as a faint green haze, suggesting a light 
cloud floating in celestial space, in form not very 
unlike that of the profile of a fish's mouth. The 
whole is composed of clouds of light of different 
degrees of brightness, some of extreme fantastic, 
and not a few of highly suggestive forms. It is in 
the perception of these that the photographic plate 
has demonstrated, as powerfully as in any of its 
applications, its great superiority over the eye in its 
capacity of appreciating the faintest shades of light. 
Structure is revealed throughout the whole nebula 
by the manner in which streams of luminous matter 
are directed from a brilliant and nearly central 
region in close proximity to the mouth-like bay of 
dark sky, the importance of this region being 



The Life of a Star. 15 

emphasized by the occurrence in it of a remarkable 
group of stars "the trapezium of Orion" and in 
the symmetrical arrangement of many of the cloud- 
forms with reference to it. Many stars are scattered 
over the picture; that those of the trapezium are 
actually involved in the glowing wreaths of the 
nebula itself, and do not owe their appearance in it 
to the effect of optical projection, either by their 
lying by chance in the line of sight towards the 
nebula, or by being visible through its transparent 
substance while actually far beyond, is rendered 
overwhelmingly probable from their position with 
reference to the cloud-forms, as well as by certain 
relations that have been shown to exist between 
their analysed light and that of the immediately 
surrounding nebula, in the spectroscopic researches 
of Sir William Huggins. 

The diffuse character of the outlines of the nebula 
renders it impossible to apply to it such delicate 
measurements of direction as are necessary for the 
determination of the parallax. For this reason its 
distance cannot be directly investigated. The stars 
of the trapezium have, however, shown no parallax; 
from this it becomes possible to assign roughly a 
minimum limit beyond which they, and therefore 
in all probability the nebula, must lie. Such 
distance can scarcely be less than a million times 
that of the Sun. To appear of its vast extent, even 
at this, the most modest estimate, its glowing 
clouds must extend over such abysmal depths, that 
the whole of the Solar System if plunged into it would 
become contemptible in its utter insignificance. 



16 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

The Nebula of Orion is a noble example of an 
"irregular nebula". That of Andromeda, in its 
regular ellipticity of outline, in the uniformity in 
the central condensation of its light, and in the 
system of elliptical rings by which it is enveloped, 
forms so strong a contrast with it that it is difficult 
to regard the two as objects belonging to the same 
class. Other nebulae display a spiral structure; 
others again appear as fairly sharply denned plan- 
etary discs ; while the majority are to all appearance 
nothing more than minute structureless clouds of 
flocculent light. 

In the early period of their discovery, a discovery 
that followed naturally upon Galileo's first applica- 
tion of the telescope to astronomical observation in 
1609, nebulas were regarded as diffusions of a lucid 
medium shining by its own inherent lustre. In 
1780, the year that marked the commencement of 
Sir William Herschel's classical researches upon 
them, less than 150 were known; but as the result 
of those researches, which extended over a period 
of twenty-one years, their number had been in- 
creased to close upon 2500. By their extended 
distribution in space, as well as by the detailed 
structure revealed in many of them by Herschel's 
observations, the nebulas had acquired a new im- 
portance in the system of the Universe. 

From a not altogether satisfactory deduction from 
the universality of gravitation, an extension of 
natural law that his own discovery of the mutual 
revolution of the components of double stars went 
far to establish, Herschel was led, in the earlier 



The Life of a Star. 17 

period of his researches, to reject the generally 
received view regarding the nature of nebulae, and 
to substitute for it one according to which they were 
clusters of stars, the component stars being too 
faint, by reason, it was supposed, of excessive dis- 
tance, for their individuality to be recognized. 
While maintaining this view with regard to the 
constitution of some nebulae, Herschel, however, 
subsequently reverted to the former hypothesis to 
account for many of them, these including the 
Nebula of Orion, regarding them as " extensions 
of a shining fluid of a nature unknown to us ". He 
further framed a first consistent scheme of stellar 
evolution, in suggesting that individual stars and 
clusters of stars were formed by the condensation 
of this nebula substance by the power of gravita- 
tion. 

During the first half of the present century 
scientific opinion entirely reverted to the earlier 
of Herschel's views. Changes in the outlines of 
certain nebulae, and the absence of structure in 
others of the "planetary" class, both of which 
Herschel, thinking that he had established by 
observation, had advanced in support of his later 
views, failed to receive confirmation in their ex- 
amination by later astronomers. As with increased 
telescopic power many objects classed as nebulae 
were one by one resolved into collections of stars, 
the conviction became increasingly strong, that, 
with sufficiently refined means, all would ultimately 
succumb: and when at length, in 1850, the Great 
Nebula of Orion was thought, from its appearance 

(M620) B 



i8 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

in the gigantic telescope of Lord Rosse, to show 
indications of breaking into clouds of stars, the 
riddle of the nebulae appeared to be approaching its 
last solution. As clusters of stars the nebulae found 
ready place in the speculations of many astrono- 
mers, whose minds, in consequence of the perfection 
displayed in the relations between the Sun and 
planets, had become powerfully impressed with the 
conception of a system as an essential unit in the 
construction of the universe. The planets, with 
their attendant satellites, formed systems, fair 
images of the grander Solar System, in which they 
were included. Each star was regarded as a sun, 
the centre of a planetary system of its own. Visible 
isolated stars formed with our Sun a larger but 
essentially similar system or "galaxy", in which it 
was even conjectured that all members might re- 
volve round a central orb ; while nebulas were other 
systems of suns, external galaxies, awfully remote 
from our galaxy and from each other; oases of 
active energy scattered through space. The de- 
molition of this stupendous conception by later 
researches has been advanced as supplying the 
only instance in which astronomical discovery has 
failed to reveal in the actual a more majestic scheme 
than had previously been idealized in the boldest 
imagination. 

While, however, the colossal reflector of the 
Earl of Rosse was engaged, it was fondly believed, 
in finally establishing the nebulae as clusters of 
faint stars, the researches of Angstrom, Bunsen, 
Kirchhoff, and others were placing upon a firm 



The Life of a Star. 19 

foundation the principles of a new science that was 
shortly to enter the arena, with the result of utterly 
confounding general expectation. The develop- 
ment of the science of Spectrum Analysis forms the 
subject of a later chapter of the present work. 
Here it must be sufficient to record that as early 
as 1672 Sir Isaac Newton had shown that, upon 
passing a ray of sunlight through a glass prism, it 
became separated into its constituent colours, by 
reason of the fact that all rays are deflected or 
"refracted" on traversing the prism, but that rays 
of different colours are refracted to different degrees; 
that after the lapse of a century and a half the study 
of the analysis of light was resumed and the instru- 
mental means greatly improved by Fraunhofer of 
Munich ; and that, by the labours of Kirchhoff and 
Bunsen, the spectroscope assumed its place as a 
powerful instrument of research about the year 
1860. 

The spectroscope is essentially an instrument 
whereby light consisting of a mixture of colours 
is, after entering the instrument by a narrow slit, 
resolved into its constituent colours by a prism, or 
occasionally by an equivalent "diffraction grating". 
The separated colours are in either case spread out 
into a tinted band or "spectrum". About the 
middle of the present century observations with the 
spectroscope had indicated that there was a remark- 
able difference between light emitted by a glowing 
gas and that radiated from an incandescent solid 
or liquid body. With light emanating from an 
incandescent solid or liquid, such as that emitted 



20 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

by a glowing mass of white-hot metal, or by a gas 
flame in which the greater part of the luminosity 
is due to incandescent clouds of soot deposited in 
the flame from the decomposition of the gas under 
the intense heat of combustion, and, with a limita- 
tion to be noticed subsequently, that from the Sun 
and from the great majority of the stars, the spec- 
trum consists of a continuous band in which all the 
colours of the rainbow are represented, each passing 
into the next by insensible gradations, while red 
and violet occupy the extreme positions. In the 
light from a glowing gas, however, at any rate 
when the density of the gas is not excessive, this is 
not the case, the light being now resolved into a 
series of clearly-defined and separate colours, which 
appear in the spectroscope as bright lines of 
coloured light separated by dark intervals; the 
lines are, in fact, images of the slit by which the 
light enters the instrument, a separate image being 
formed by each of the colours present. The light 
from the flame of a spirit-lamp which has acquired 
a strong yellow tint by sprinkling a trace of com- 
mon salt upon the wick, is, for instance, resolved 
into two closely coincident shades of yellow, indi- 
cated in the spectroscope by the appearance of a 
pair of closely adjacent yellow lines; and the peach- 
coloured glow emitted by hydrogen gas when 
rendered luminous by a discharge of electricity 
through it, gives rises to the appearance of several 
coloured lines, of which a crimson and an emerald- 
green appeal most strongly to the eye. 

In the year 1864 Sir William Huggins first 



The Life of a Star. 21 

applied the spectroscope to the study of the nebulae, 
the particular one selected being a small but com- 
paratively bright object in the constellation of the 
Dragon. The light from the nebula was condensed 
upon the slit of the spectroscope by the object-glass, 
8 inches in diameter, of an astronomical teie- 
scope; and at the first glance, the examination of 
the spectrum showed it to be characteristic of the 
light emitted from a glowing gas, since it consisted, 
not of a continuous band, but of three separated 
lines, all of them being of a green colour. The 
luminous matter of the nebula consisted, therefore, 
not of a host of stars, but of incandescent gas ; and 
the more matured views of Sir William Herschel 
were established upon a sound scientific basis. 

During the four years following this observation 
Huggins subjected the light from seventy other 
nebulas to analysis; and of them about one-third, 
including the Great Nebula in Orion, proved to be 
gaseous. The remaining two-thirds yielded " con- 
tinuous " spectra, spectra in which all shades of 
colour were represented, and might, therefore, so 
far as spectroscopic evidence was concerned, con- 
sist of systems of stars, of gas possessing compara- 
tively high density, or of gas in an incipient stage 
of condensation. The structure of some of these as 
revealed by the photographic plate lends strong 
support to the last hypothesis ; in the Great Nebula 
in Andromeda, for instance, it is scarcely possible not 
to recognize the process of condensation as actually in 
progress. Nearly one-half of the nebulas owe their 
luminosity to the presence in them of glowing gas. 



22 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

It is difficult not to see in the gaseous nebulae the 
stuff of which future stars will be made. Granting 
that their substance is subject to the law of gravita- 
tion, it appears certain that in coming ages their 
glowing matter must, under its influence, be drawn 
towards centres of condensation ; the smaller and 
more symmetrical of the nebulae possibly developing 
into single stars, but such majestic collections of 
cloudy structures as are revealed in Orion being 
more probably the origin of hosts of separate 
suns. 

Turning from these impressive representations of 
the birth of suns, it now becomes our task to seek 
among the heavenly bodies for the more sombre but 
scarcely less impressive record of their death; to 
search among their resplendent brethren for evidence 
of the existence of spent and dark suns. A dark star 
may conceivably become known to us in either of 
two ways : it may in its wanderings through space 
interpose itself between the Earth and a bright star, 
thus producing a total or a partial eclipse of the 
latter ; or it may approach sufficiently near a visible 
star to affect it sensibly by its gravitational influence, 
in which case it may be possible to deduce the ex- 
istence of the dark star from the disturbance apparent 
in the movement of the bright one. There can be 
no doubt that the existence of dark stars has been 
revealed in both of these ways, and both methods of 
research are admirably illustrated in the discovery 
of the notorious dark companion of Algol. 

From the extremity of the shallower and left arm 
of the familiar W of Cassiopeia, and setting off in 



The Life of a Star. 23 

a direction making sensibly a right angle with the 
limb, a gracefully curved line is naturally traced in 
the heavens by the stars of Perseus and terminated 
in the resplendent orb of Capella. A straight line 
diverging to the left of this stream and proceeding 
slightly forwards from the brightest and nearly 
central star in Perseus, is directed to Algol, the best- 
known of the variable stars. 

The variable character of the light of Algol is said 
to have been first observed by Montanari in 1669, 
though, owing to the great difficulty in measuring 
the intensity of starlight, it has only been possible 
in recent years to trace the exact law of its variation 
with any approach to scientific accuracy. Normally, 
Algol appears as one of the conspicuously brilliant 
stars of the heavens, its brightness being sensibly 
the same as that of the Pole Star. At intervals ot 
time that appear to be subject to a very slow varia- 
tion, and which are at present represented by 2 days 
10 hours 48 minutes and 52 seconds, its light com- 
mences to fade, and continues to do so for 4^ hours, 
by which time it has decreased to two-fifths of its 
normal brightness. This minimum value it retains 
for 20 minutes, after which it resumes its normal 
lustre in a manner which is nearly, though not 
exactly, the reversed image of its fading. 

In 1782 Goodricke, impressed with the regularity 
displayed in the repeated variations of the star's 
light, suggested as the cause of it the existence of a 
dark companion revolving round Algol in an orbit 
presented edgeways to the Earth, so that at each 
revolution the bright star would suffer partial eclipse 



24 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

by the interposition of its companion between it and 
the Earth. The explanation was obviously sufficient 
to account for the mere fact of periodic variation, and 
its truth appeared more probable, when, a century 
later, the spectroscope showed the variation of the 
star's light to be unaccompanied by any change in 
its quality. Such change would indicate change in 
the star itself, and is frequently a conspicuous feature 
in the variation of other and less regularly variable 
stars. The probability of the truth of the eclipse 
theory of Algol was still further increased when in 
1888 Professor E. C. Pickering of Harvard, by the 
application of the "meridian photometer", an in- 
strument by the invention of which it became possible 
to measure the intensity of the light of a star with a 
degree of accuracy previously unattainable, found, 
from the examination of the light of Algol at repeated 
intervals during the progress of its variation, the law 
or method of its variation to be essentially such as 
would result from the interposition of a dark sphere 
between the Earth and a luminous one. 

Closely following upon Pickering's researches, 
and by the application of a principle suggested by 
him, the final demonstration of the existence of 
Algol's dark companion was effected by Vogel at 
Potsdam, from observations made between the years 
1888 and 1891. Assuming the existence of a star 
revolving round Algol, it would appear probable 
that the force necessary to constrain it to continually 
follow its curved path would be found in gravitational 
attraction exercised upon it by Algol. By such a 
force, the attraction of the Earth, the Moon is main- 



The Life of a Star. 25 

tained in its nearly circular path around it; by such 
forces, the attractions exercised upon them by the 
Sun, the planets follow without deviation their de- 
termined orbits. If, however, Algol attracts its 
companion, it follows from the necessary equality 
between action and reaction as expressed in Newton's 
Third Law of Motion, that the companion must 
attract Algol with an equal and opposite force, and 
it is conceivable that motion of Algol caused by the 
attraction of the companion might be capable of 
detection. 

The character of the motion of two mutually at- 
tracting bodies was first determined by Newton. It 
was shown by him to follow from the laws of motion, 
combined with the fact that the attraction of gravi- 
tation varies inversely with the square of the distance 
separating the attracting masses, that the pair must 
describe similar conic sections having a common 
focus, which is continually occupied by the centre 
of mass of the pair. 1 Which of the three possible 
forms of conic section will be assumed by the orbits 
depends upon the initial circumstances of the motion, 
but the greatest interest is attached to the ellipse, 
which, being the only conic section forming a closed 
curve, must be the orbit in every case in which the 
motion is repeated. 

The mutual revolution of the Earth and Moon 
supplies an interesting illustration of the nature of 
the motion under consideration. The Moon is 

J The term "centre of mass" corresponds to the point more generally 
known in elementary mechanics as "centre of gravity". For obvious 
reasons the term " centre of gravity" would be quite inappropriate in cases 
similar to that under consideration. 



26 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

maintained in its elliptical and nearly circular orbit 
by the gravitational attraction of the Earth. 1 The 
Moon must therefore attract the Earth with a force 
equal to this; and the Earth, being in no way 
anchored in space, must move under the influence 
of the Moon's attraction. The fact of its motion is 
beyond doubt, both from theoretical considerations 
and from practical observation ; and the nature of it 
is expressed by the statement that the Earth and 
Moon continually describe similar elliptical and 
nearly circular orbits about their centre of mass, this 
point being in a common focus and nearly in the 
centre of each orbit. The general statement that 
the Moon describes an elliptical orbit round the 
Earth is, therefore, though not inexact, incomplete. 
It would be equally true, and not inexact, to regard 
the Earth as describing an elliptical orbit round the 
Moon. Since, however, the mass of the Earth is 
eighty times that of the Moon, the centre of mass of 
the pair is eighty times nearer to the centre of the 
Earth than to the centre of the Moon, lying in con- 
sequence well within the Earth itself; so that the 
actual orbit described by the Moon is far larger than 
that described by the Earth. It is the common 
centre of mass of the Earth and Moon that describes 
an elliptical orbit yearly about the Sun. 

With the assistance of the diagram given in fig. 2 
there will be no difficulty in forming a definite picture 
of the system of Algol and its companion, and of 

1 The reader may be reminded that the circle is merely a particular form 
of an ellipse, that in which the greatest and least lines drawn through the 
centre, or the major and minor axes, are of equal length. The focus of a 
circle and its centre coincide. 



The Life of a Star. 



27 




Fig. 2. The System of Algol. 



their relative movements. The point o is the centre 
of mass of the pair, and since it is represented as 
one-half as far from Algol as from the companion, 
the companion is regarded as possessing one-half 
the mass of Algol. 
The orbits are re- 
presented as circles, 
though, in accord- 
ance with the law 
of gravitation, they 
might be any va- 
riety of similar 
ellipses. Whatever 
the relative masses 
of the pair, and 
whatever the degree of ellipticity of the orbits, the 
general principle, however, remains unaffected. The 
Solar System is imagined as lying far away upon 
the right; and, from the fact that no parallax has 
been detected in Algol, it follows that upon the scale 
according to which the orbit of Algol is represented, 
the distance of the Solar System must be, at the 
least estimate, 5 miles. When at A, Algol will be 
eclipsed by the interposition between it and the 
Earth of its dark companion at c. From these 
positions the star and its companion will proceed in 
their orbital revolutions, moving in the directions 
indicated by the arrows, their relative speeds being 
determined by the condition that the pair must at 
every instant lie upon opposite sides of the centre of 
mass, the position of which remains unaffected by 
their motion. It will be clear, therefore, that if the 



28 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

hypothesis of the dark star's existence is sound, to 
an observer upon the Earth provided with sufficiently 
delicate means of observation, Algol should appear 
to swing to and fro about the point o, attaining its 
greatest displacement upon either side of it when at 
A' and A". If, however, the orbit of Algol were even 
to equal that of the Earth round the sun in magni- 
tude, the consequent displacement in its position 
would be so slight as to escape detection by the 
most refined observational means existing, 1 and it 
has, in fact, never been detected. 

During the orbital revolution of Algol there is, 
however, a relative displacement of another kind 
between it and the Earth. In executing one half 
of its orbit the star must continually approach the 
Earth, while during the other half it must recede 
from it. Assuming the orbits to be circles, the 
star should approach the Earth in moving from 
the position A in which it is eclipsed, the approach 
becoming direct, and therefore most rapid at A', 
a quarter period later; while at A" there should 
exist an equally rapid and direct motion of recession. 
It is in the detection of these alternate movements 
of approach and recession that Vogel has achieved 
one of the most remarkable triumphs of observa- 
tional astronomy. 

The immediate principle, to the successful appli- 
cation of which Vogel's demonstration of the 
motion of Algol is due, will be more fully explained 
in a later chapter. It follows as a necessary con- 

i This conclusion is directly involved in the statement that the parallax of 
Algol is inappreciable by the most refined observational means existing. 



The Life of a Star. 29 

sequence of the wave theory of light that a source 
of light approaching the observer should crowd 
together and thus shorten its light-waves in front 
of it, and in consequence alter the nature of the 
light, raising its colour in the spectral series, that 
is, causing it to approach the violet in hue, and 
increasing its refrangibility. A movement of re- 
cession should correspondingly draw out, and thus 
lengthen, the light -waves travelling behind the 
source and towards the observer, lowering the 
colour towards the red of the spectrum, and de- 
creasing the refrangibility. In 1842 Doppler had 
suggested that the apparent colours of certain stars 
might thus be affected by their movement, a rapidly 
approaching star acquiring a bluish, and a rapidly 
receding one a ruddy tinge. The suggestion, 
however, failed, for various reasons; among them, 
the fatal one, that, owing to the high speed of light, 
such transcendent velocities as would be necessary 
to produce such a change in the colour of a star 
that should be appreciable to the eye would trans- 
form the whole aspect of the heavens in a few years. 
The true direction in which to search for a record 
in the light of a star of indications of its approach 
or recession was indicated by Fizeau in 1848, and 
lies in the careful measurement of the positions of 
the dark lines with which the spectra of the Sun 
and of the greater number of the stars are ruled 
throughout, the suggestiveness of which was at that 
time beginning to be recognized. These dark lines 
simply indicate colours absent in sunlight and star- 
light, and the absent colours are affected by the 



30 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

motion of the source precisely as are those actually 
present. Consequently the approach of a star 
should raise the colours absent in its light towards 
the violet, and the dark lines in its spectrum should 
therefore be displaced toward the violet end of the 
spectrum; the reverse occurring in the case of a 
receding star. In 1868 Sir William Huggins 
succeeded in detecting slight displacements in the 
spectral lines of certain stars, and, assigning the 
displacements to this cause, estimated from them 
the velocities of the stars in the direction of the 
line of sight. It was this method that Picker- 
ing suggested should be brought to bear upon 
the problem of Algol and its hypothetical com- 
panion. 

In photographs of the spectrum of Algol, taken 
at intervals during the years 1888 to 1891, the 
movement of the star, and precisely such movement 
as was demanded by the eclipse theory, was estab- 
lished beyond doubt. When under eclipse, as 
well as later by an interval equal to one-half of that 
between successive eclipses, at which time the star 
should be between its companion and the Earth, 
the spectrum of its light should be normal, since 
at these instants its motion should be directly across 
the line of sight, and should neither be towards nor 
from the observer. During the half-period preced- 
ing eclipse the motion of the star should be from 
the observer, and the spectral lines should be there- 
fore displaced towards the red as the result of the 
drawing out of the light-waves, while after eclipse 
the motion of recession should be replaced by one 



The Life of a Star. 31 

of approach, and the spectral lines should be shifted 
towards the violet. Every one of these predictions 
was confirmed in Vogel's photographs. The maxi- 
mum displacement of the lines, which occurred, as 
they should have, at quarter-periods before and after 
eclipse, indicated velocities of recession of 24*4, 
and approach of 28-6 miles per second respectively, 
the difference between the two values being natu- 
rally explained upon the assumption that the speed 
of Algol in its orbit is 26*5 miles per second, the 
mean of the two, and that the system of Algol and 
the companion is approaching the Solar System 
with a speed of 2-1 miles per second. Knowing the 
orbital speed of Algol, as well as its period of re- 
volution, the interval between successive eclipses, 
it is a simple matter to calculate the circumference, 
and from it the radius, of its orbit. The final result 
is almost exactly a million miles, from which it 
follows that the oscillation of Algol across the line 
of sight is far too small to be capable of detection. 

The dark companion of Algol suggests the picture 
of the death-stage of a sun. In nine other stars, 
variation in light, in nature similar to that exhibited 
by Algol, points strongly to a similar cause. In 
another star, Spica, the existence of an invisible 
companion is indicated by the displacement of 
spectral lines, though no eclipse results, probably 
from the plane of the orbits making a sufficiently 
large angle with the line of sight for the dark star 
to clear the bright one at each revolution. 

In the few cases in which the existence of dark stars 
has been revealed, their detection has been due to 



32 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

the fact of their close association with bright stars. 
Only by an inconceivably remote chance would it 
be possible to become aware of the existence of an 
isolated dark star by either of the methods that 
have been so successfully applied to the companion 
of Algol. Such knowledge of stellar distances as 
we possess renders it probable that the suns of 
space are separated from their nearest neighbours 
by depths so vast that were there dark stars scat- 
tered at random among them exceeding the bright 
ones by many times in number, the probability of 
one of them approaching so near to a visible star 
as to sensibly affect it by gravitation would be 
excessively remote, 1 while, since it is not possible 
to continually examine more than an insignificant 
minority of the visible stars, either as regards 
position upon the face of the sky, by change of 
which motion across the line of sight would be 
apparent, or spectroscopically, by which motion in 
the line of sight might be revealed, it is probable 
that millions of near approaches between isolated 
dark stars and brilliant ones would occur before the 
effect of one would be detected. 

The probability of becoming aware of the exist- 
ence of a dark star by its drifting by chance across 
the line of sight directed from the Earth toward a 
more distant brilliant one appears equally remote. 
It is impossible to contemplate even the most 
crowded regions of the heavens through a telescope 
of fine quality, and of large light-grasping power, 

1 With the exception possibly of the more crowded regions of the Milky 
Way. 



The Life of a Star. 33 

without recognizing that among the myriads of 
bright points scattered over the field of view there 
is ample room for the existence of dark stars far 
exceeding them in number. The brighter only 
among the stars appear in the telescope as discs 
of sensible dimensions ; but the reader is probably 
aware that such " spurious" discs result from imper- 
fections in the eye, and from the inherent principles 
of telescopic construction. Were the telescope 
and the eye alike perfect, such is the stupendous 
remoteness of the stars, that, although suns, the 
nearest of them, even if far exceeding our Sun in 
magnitude, would appear under the highest magni- 
fying power that has so far been applied to them, as 
mere specks of light devoid of sensible dimension. 

Although the apparent dimensions of stars are 
far beyond the possibility of detection with the 
most perfect optical means, it is, however, possible 
to make a rough estimate of the extent of sky 
covered by individual stars or by the whole collec- 
tion. The possibility of effecting this is based 
upon the fact that the apparent brightness of any 
surface is independent of its remoteness. If, for 
instance, the Sun were removed to three times its 
present distance, the light received from it would, 
according to the law of inverse squares, be reduced 
to one-ninth of its present value; but since its 
apparent size or the area in the sky covered by 
it would similarly be reduced to one -ninth, the 
apparent brightness of its surface would remain 
unchanged. If, therefore, there were a number 
of sun-like bodies in space, each of the same in- 

(M520) C 



34 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

trinsic brilliancy as the Sun, but differing both in 
size and distance from the Earth, it would follow 
that, since the apparent surface brightness of all 
would be the same, the amount of light received 
from any one of them would be in direct proportion 
to its apparent size, or to the sky-surface covered 
by it. 

The total amount of light received from all the 
stars above 9^ magnitude (visibility to the naked 
eye terminates at the 6th magnitude) has been esti- 
mated by Mr. Plummer. The result, slightly 
modified in accordance with more recent measure- 
ments of the brightness of Sirius, far the most 
important star of the whole, is given by Miss Clerke 
as one-eightieth of that of the Full Moon. The ratio 
of the light of the Sun to that of the Full Moon 
has been estimated by Zollner as 619,000 to i, so 
that the Sun exceeds the total of the stars above 
gtf magnitude in their illumination of the Earth 
by 80 times 619,000, or nearly 50 million times. 
If, therefore, the assumption be made that the 
surfaces of the stars are of the same intrinsic 
brilliancy as the Sun, it follows that the stars cover 
a portion of the sky equal to one 5o-millionth of 
that covered by the Sun ; and since the Sun covers 
but one 2io,oooth of the total of the sky, it follows 
that the stars would cover rather less than one 10- 
billionth. 

It was necessary to limit the above estimate to 
the 324,000 stars above the g% magnitude as there 
is no means of determining the light received from 
the fainter ones. These 324,000 stars, however, far 



The Life of a Star. 35 

more than include those among which there could 
be any hope of detecting an eclipse by an isolated 
dark star. 

Should dark stars far exceeding the bright ones 
in number exist in celestial space, an eclipse of one 
of the latter would therefore be a phenomenon of 
rare occurrence ; while, should an eclipse occur, so 
few are the stars the brightness of which is sub- 
jected to continual scrutiny that the probability of 
its passing unnoticed is overwhelming. 

The possibility of an unseen system of stars per- 
meating the seen is beyond doubt. The system of 
the seen is indeed sufficient to satisfy the highest 
ambition of imagination, but he would be bold who 
should assert that it may not well form but an 
insignificant fraction of a still more surpassingly 
transcendent whole. 

The question as to the nature of the changes now 
taking place in the Sun is one of very great interest, 
and its study involves physical considerations of 
high importance and not free from grave difficulty. 

The delicate and mottled tracery visible under 
the most favourable conditions for telescopic obser- 
vation over the entire surface of the Sun, is strongly 
suggestive of the view that its bright surface 
generally known as the photosphere consists of 
an accumulation of incandescent clouds. Such a 
cloudy structure of the photosphere is in harmony 
with the general results of solar observation, more 
especially, perhaps, with the nature and the rapidity 
of the changes frequently characteristic of sun spots, 
which, according to this view, are either depressions 



36 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

or actual gaps in the photosphere. The spectro- 
scope indicates as existing above the level of the 
photosphere a solar atmosphere, as constituents of 
which the vapours of hydrogen, calcium, iron, and 
other metals are conspicuous, and in which are 
traceable with greater difficulty those of a few of 
the non- metallic elements. It is not difficult to 
imagine the process of formation of the clouds of 
the photosphere from the precipitation as fog of the 
more readily condensable of these vapours by their 
cooling consequent upon their being carried into 
the upper regions of the atmosphere. 

The question as to the physical conditions exist- 
ing in the interior of the Sun is attended with 
graver difficulty, and is of the first importance in 
the problem under consideration. Herschel im- 
agined as existing beneath the clouds of the photo- 
sphere, a solid globe ; and even advanced the view, 
so preposterous to modern students of physical 
science, that it might, from the protection of a 
second and intervening cloud shell cool and im- 
pervious to heat radiation, be protected from the 
intense glare of the photosphere above to such an 
extent as to be a cool and habitable world. When 
the necessity for the interior heat of the Sun being 
at least as high as that of its exterior became recog- 
nized, the solid globe was generally replaced by an 
ocean of molten matter. 

It is, however, scarcely possible to regard as 
existing in the interior of the Sun, matter in either 
the solid or in the liquid condition. The tempera- 
ture above the photosphere is such that iron, car- 



The Life of a Star. 37 

bon, and other among 1 the most refractory of ele- 
ments known to terrestrial chemistry are found in it 
in the gaseous state; and the temperature of these 
external regions must be far lower than that of the 
interior. It was for a time regarded as barely pos- 
sible that the enormous pressure that must exist at 
great depths in the interior of the Sun might be 
effective in maintaining matter in the solid or liquid 
condition in spite of the high temperature, since it 
is a familiar fact in laboratory experience, that lique- 
faction of a gas is in every case assisted by pressure, 
and may in many instances apparently be effected by 
it alone. Since, however, it became apparent from 
the classical researches of Dr. Andrews in 1869, 
that there exists for every element a critical tempera- 
ture, above which it is impossible for it under any 
conditions of pressure to assume the liquid state, it 
has generally been regarded that a liquid interior 
to the Sun is next to an impossibility. The Sun is, 
in all probability, essentially an enormous bubble, 
enveloped in incandescent cloud, from which, by 
the mechanism of radiation, its energy is transmitted 
into external space. 

From the fact that the degradation of a star from 
its earliest nebular to its dark state is the direct 
consequence of the radiation of its heat into space; 
and as, in ordinary experience, loss of heat is ac- 
companied by fall in temperature, it has frequently 
been assumed that the life of a star must be the 
record of continual fall in temperature ; and that in 
the nebulae would be found the highest temperatures 
represented in celestial bodies. To the "fiery mist" 

429055 



38 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

from which Laplace, in 1796, had imagined the 
development of the system of the Sun and planets, 
a temperature was assigned far higher than that of 
the Sun at present; and the same view was extended 
to the nebulas, when the demonstration of their 
gaseous nature had indicated them as fulfilling in 
the Cosmos the functions of embryonic stars. 

Recent considerations based upon the experimen- 
tally ascertained properties of gases and upon the 
principle of conservation of energy have, however, 
shown that this simple view cannot be maintained. 
Attention has already been directed to the fact that 
each step in the radiation of heat from the Sun brings 
about a shrinkage of its bulk, or, more exactly, 
enables the gravitation of its parts to draw them 
closer together, and that by this act of compression 
other heat is developed. In a very remarkable 
paper, published in 1870, Mr. Homer Lane has 
shown that if the Sun were entirely gaseous, and if 
the gases composing it were under such physical 
conditions that the laws of " perfect gases" should 
be applicable to them, the heat developed by shrink- 
age must not merely equal but must so far exceed 
that radiated to effect it, that the temperature of the 
whole must actually rise in consequence, and must 
continue to do so for so long as a perfectly gaseous 
condition is maintained. 

A "perfect gas" is defined as one in which, for 
so long as its temperature is unchanged, any increase 
in pressure brings about a proportionate decrease 
in volume. This condition, known as "Boyle's 
Law ", is very closely fulfilled by hydrogen, oxygen, 



The Life of a Star. 39 

and nitrogen, as well as by gases in general when 
under conditions far removed from those under 
which they assume the liquid condition, so long as 
their density is not rendered excessive by intense 
pressure. Under extreme pressure, however, de- 
crease in volume becomes increasingly less than 
that demanded in Boyle's Law, and it is probable 
that for every gas at a given temperature there is a 
limiting volume beyond which it cannot be com- 
pressed by any pressure however great. 

The statement of Lane's theorem that it is pos- 
sible under certain conditions for a body to rise in 
temperature as the result of its loss of heat appears 
at first so contrary to common experience that there 
is generally great difficulty in thoroughly accepting 
it. That emission of heat is not inseparably asso- 
ciated with fall of temperature, will, however, be 
clear from the consideration of such instances as are 
supplied by the condensation of a vapour and the 
solidification of a liquid. The passage of steam 
into water at its boiling-point is unaccompanied by 
any fall in temperature, though the amount of heat 
given out is more than five times that necessary to 
raise the temperature of the water from its freezing- 
point to its boiling-point. Similarly, the freezing of 
water is unaccompanied by any fall in temperature, 
though here again a large amount of heat is emitted 
by the solidifying water four-fifths of that required 
to raise the water from its freezing- to its boiling- 
point. In a mass of gas subject to no external force, 
development of heat results from its compression 
under forces due to the gravitation of its parts; it is 



4 o Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

loss of heat, not fall in temperature, that enables the 
gravitational forces to become effective in producing 
compression. 

In the hope of assisting the reader towards form- 
ing a clear picture of one of the most remarkable of 
natural processes, a confessedly incomplete demon- 
stration of Lane's theorem is given in the following 
paragraph, which may be omitted if the mechanical 
and geometrical principles involved should not 
appear sufficiently familiar. An essentially similar 
demonstration, by which indeed the one given here 
was suggested, is given in Newcomb's Astronomy. 

Let a globe of a " perfect" gas be imagined, 
temperature being uniform throughout it, and let 
the whole be at rest, free from internal currents, and 
subject only to its own gravitation. All portions of 
the globe are attracted toward the centre, and a 
pressure is produced thereby that continually in- 
creases toward the centre. According to Boyle's 
Law the density must similarly increase toward the 
centre. Let the whole globe be imagined as con- 
sisting of a number of concentric spherical shells, 
each enveloping those within it in the manner sug- 
gested by the coats of an onion, and let attention be 
directed to one of these shells. The total pressure 
of the gas comprising the shell is due to the weight 
that is, the gravitation toward the centre of the 
portion of the gas outside of it, and this pressure is 
distributed over the outer surface of the shell. Now 
imagine the globe to lose heat by radiation, and to 
shrink in consequence until its radius has become 
reduced by one-half. If the process occurs so 



The Life of a Star. 41 

gradually that the temperature changes uniformly 
throughout the whole, all portions will shrink 
equally, the radius of the shell will be reduced to 
one-half, and therefore, by elementary geometry, 
its surface will be one-fourth and its volume one- 
eighth of their former values. The distance of 
every part of the globe from the centre will be 
halved and the attraction of each portion to the 
centre will, since gravitation is inversely propor- 
tional to the square of the distance, therefore be 
increased fourfold. The whole weight of the portion 
of the globe that lies beyond the shell will therefore 
be increased fourfold, but, as this weight is now 
distributed over one-fourth of the former surface, the 
intensity of the pressure will be increased to sixteen 
times its former value. Such an increase in the 
intensity of the pressure would, if the temperature 
of the shell had remained unchanged, compress the 
gas in it to one-sixteenth of its former value. It 
has, however, been shown that the gas occupies 
one-eighth of its former volume, double the volume 
that it should occupy had the temperature remained 
unchanged. Such an excess in volume can only 
be due to increased temperature, and its tempera- 
ture must consequently have risen. 

It is scarcely necessary to add that a shrinkage of 
the radius to one-half is assumed only for the sake 
of simplicity; the same result a necessary rise in 
temperature would follow from the assumption of 
any given contraction. 

If, then, the Sun behaves as a perfect gas, its 
temperature must be increasing as the indirect 



42 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

result of the torrent of heat continually radiated 
into external space. There is good reason to re- 
gard it as probable that the Sun is in the main 
gaseous, but it would be rash to assume that under 
the extreme conditions of pressure and temperature 
existing in its interior, the laws of perfect gases are 
fulfilled by it even approximately. The properties 
of gases become markedly modified even at such 
moderately high temperatures and pressures as it is 
possible to produce in the laboratory, and in such a 
manner as to suggest that could the matter of the 
interior of the Sun be subjected to examination, 
although it would prove to be neither solid nor 
liquid, it would be difficult to trace in it the gaseous 
characteristics with which we are familiar. It is 
therefore impossible to decide the interesting point 
whether the Sun is at present rising or falling in 
temperature, though there can be little doubt that 
in the remote past, when far more tenuous, its tem- 
perature must have been lower than it is at the 
present time. 

Whatever the present trend of the temperature 
of the Sun, it is, to say the least, unnecessary to 
assume a high temperature for the nebula from 
which it has been derived. Imagining a nebula 
from which a single star is to be evolved as a com- 
paratively cool diffuse extension of gas, of so low a 
temperature and of so great a tenuity that it should 
obey the laws of perfect gases, not necessarily suffi- 
ciently hot for the whole of its constituents to exist 
in it in the gaseous condition, but possibly embrac- 
ing them in its volume as discrete solid or liquid 



The Life of a Star. 43 

particles, it becomes possible to take a rough fore- 
cast of its future career. Under the influence of 
the gravitational attraction upon each other of all 
its parts, it would tend to acquire a spherical form. 
Heat would pass into space by radiation ; gravita- 
tion would in consequence be enabled to draw its 
parts closer together; the temperature would rise, 
and portions of its solid or liquid ingredients would 
become gas. 1 The process would continue, and 
after a time the nebula would become in the main 
gaseous. At some period excessive local cooling 
in the outermost parts would cause condensation 
there and a photospheric cloud shell would be 
formed. The nebula has now become a sun. For 
a time its temperature continues to rise and its 
radiation becomes more and more effective. At 
length, however, possibly owing to excessive con- 
densation in the photosphere, possibly to tempera- 
ture and density increasing in the interior to such 
an extent that the gaseous laws are widely trans- 
gressed, the rise in temperature ceases and is soon 
replaced by a fall. The Sun has passed the zenith 
of its career and is now descending towards extinc- 
tion ; a few more ages and its radiant activity has 
ceased to be. 

The question whether any evidence is supplied 
by stars as to the course they have run from their 

x No doubt heat would also be developed from collisions between the 
non-gaseous constituents of the nebula, since these would be in motion 
under the influence of gravitation. It might even be that the first evidence 
of luminosity in the whole might be due to the generation of heat by these 
collisions, the gas itself being generally below the temperature of incandes- 
cence, as is suggested in Sir Norman Lockyer's Meteoritic Hvpothesis. 



44 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

nebulous condition whether among those visible it 
is possible to recognize individuals in the early 
period of their career, others in the meridian of 
their glory, and others again upon the descending 
path towards extinction is among the most fascinat- 
ing of the speculations of modern astronomy. It is 
generally regarded that such evidence is indicated 
in the spectroscopic analysis of their light, but it 
must be confessed that this branch of scientific 
inquiry can hardly as yet be regarded as having 
passed beyond the speculative stage. From it we 
may hope, perhaps, in the future, to be able to 
decide whether our Sun is increasing in splendour, 
or whether he has passed the period of his greatest 
glory. Here it may be permissible to add that, in 
the judgment of the writer, the evidence, though 
not free from serious difficulty in its interpretation, 
appears to indicate the former as the more probably 
true hypothesis, and that in the remote future it is 
not inconceivable that radiations of the Sun should 
rival even those of Sirius at the present time. 
Should this be so, the maximum of vitality of a 
star must be thrown far forward in its life history, 
and the duration of its decay must be correspond- 
ingly brief. 

The physical universe is inexpressibly glorious; 
and it is scarcely possible that the contemplation of 
the decay of its activity should be unaccompanied 
by a touch of sadness. One is, therefore, led to 
inquire, whether among the processes of nature no 
means are indicated by which its lost energy may 
be restored to a dead star. So far as the working 



The Life of a Star. 45 

of nature is revealed in the laws of physical science, 
the only way in which a star can re-assume its 
nebulous condition is by a collision between it and 
another, by which encounter the whole or part of 
the total energy of motion of the pair would be 
transformed into heat. The establishment of the 
equivalence between heat and motion, one of the 
noblest achievements of modern science, is now a 
familiar fact to everyone. By the destruction of 
motion heat is generated; the amount of heat is 
directly related to the masses and velocities of the 
moving matter and can be readily calculated from 
them ; while, in its turn, the heat itself may under 
suitable conditions disappear, and in so doing re- 
generate motion identical in amount with the quan- 
tity that passed out of existence in the act of heat 
creation. 1 

That many stars are moving relatively to each 
other is a matter of ready demonstration by observa- 
tions of their positions upon the sky, with the instru- 
ments of refinement now in use, at intervals of a few 
years. Their movement may be, and commonly is, 
so apparently insignificant, that centuries must 
elapse before their displacement would be apparent 
to the unaided eye; but, upon allowing for their 
excessive remoteness, speeds are revealed, many 

i To the term motion, a somewhat vague one as used generally, science 
applies a definite meaning, the product of mass into velocity. The function 
of a moving body that is in direct proportion to the heat developed in the 
alteration of its speed is, however, not this quantity, but the product of its 
mass into the square of its velocity, a quantity to which the term vis viva 
was formerly applied. One-half of the vis viva, which is of course also 
proportional to the heat equivalent, is known in modern mechanics as 
kinetic energy and is of great importance. 



46 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

comparable with, and some far greater than, those 
of the planets in their orbits. Sirius drifts over the 
face of the sky with such speed that in 1400 years 
its position will be removed from its present one by 
a distance that would just be covered by the diameter 
of the Full Moon. From the known distance of the 
star it is a simple calculation that to do this it must 
travel athwart the direction of vision with a speed 
of over ten miles per second, more than one-half of 
that of the Earth in its orbit; and this takes no 
account of any velocity the star may possess in the 
direction of the line of vision, a displacement in 
which direction would obviously not affect its 
position upon the face of the heavens. The parallax 
of Arcturus is inappreciable, from which it appears 
improbable that its distance can be less than 
4,000,000 times that of the Sun ; thus remote, the 
drift of the star, by which it would be carried across 
the diameter of the Full Moon in 700 years, 
must represent a velocity of at least 130 miles per 
second across the line of sight; the actual speed 
in this direction being greater than this, in direct 
proportion as the actual distance of the star exceeds 
the minimum limit that is here assigned to it. 
From similar considerations it appears, that in the 
case of a remarkable star in the Great Bear invisible 
to the naked eye, and known as Groombridge 1830, 
from the number assigned to it in Groombridge's 
catalogue, the speed by which the star would be 
carried in 257 years over such a portion of the 
heavens as would be covered by the Moon, the 
most rapid displacement known, must at the dis- 



The Life of a Star. 47 

tance of the star of 2,300,000 times that of the 
Sun, indicate a continual rush across the line of 
sight of 227 miles per second. 

The velocity of the Sun relatively to the stars, or, 
more definitely, the velocity of the Sun relatively to 
the mean positions of the stars, a quantity com- 
monly alluded to as "the velocity of the Sun in 
space ", an expression almost humorously devoid 
of meaning, can be estimated from an accumulation 
of such results as have been here illustrated. The 
problem was first attacked by Sir William Herschel, 
and has ever since been a favourite matter of re- 
search of astronomers, who have been enabled to 
introduce increasing refinements as more and more 
data have become available. All the methods that 
have been applied consist essentially of the deter- 
mination of the average velocities of the stars, that 
is, the determination of the velocity of the average 
position of the stars relatively to the Sun, that of 
the Sun relatively to the mean position of the stars 
being equal and opposite to this. The outcome of 
such investigations seems to indicate that the Sun 
is travelling in a line directed very nearly towards 
the brilliant star Vega, and that its velocity in this 
direction is probably between 12 and 18 miles per 
second. There is no doubt that the result as 
regards direction is far more definite and accurate 
than that as regards speed. 

In the host of the "fixed stars" is found abun- 
dance of motion, and that upon the most stupendous 
scale. A century ago it was fondly hoped that the 
movements of the stars might turn out to be of the 



48 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

orderly and permanent character revealed in the 
Solar System, and search was made for a colossal 
Sun, that should by its gravitational attraction 
control the whole. Sirius was suggested by Kant, 
other stars took its place in succession, and in 1846 
Madler, abolishing the conception of a central Sun, 
imagined that every member of the stellar host 
might describe an orbit about a centre, placed by 
him in the Pleiades, the controlling power being, 
not the overpowering attraction of one, but the com- 
bined influence of all. As the motions of the stars 
became more closely followed, it became clear that 
the hope of revealed order was not destined to be 
realized. System remains unrevealed in their move- 
ments, and the stars appear to rush in random 
directions through space. 

The problem before us then is, whether in their 
undirected career stars may not from time to time 
come into collision. Were the Earth in its orbital 
speed to meet in direct impact another planet, equal 
to it in mass and travelling with an equal speed 
in the opposite direction, and were the planets 
to escape being shattered into fragments by the 
impact, heat would be developed from the destruc- 
tion of their motion sufficient in quantity to convert 
both into a cloud of gas, 1 and it is conceivable that 



i The collision between two solid planets might result in the shattering of 
considerable portions of them into fragments, and in the fragments being 
projected into space with high velocities. The motion retained by these 
fragments would, of course, escape being converted into heat. In the case 
of stars that had not cooled so far as to reach the solid condition, such 
shattering would be less probable. See a paper by Lord Kelvin, Popular 
Lectures and Addresses, vol. i. p. 366. 



The Life of a Star. 49 

a like result might arise from collision between 
stars. From the insignificant dimensions of the 
visible stars in comparison with the celestial spaces 
in which they have their being, the chance against 
a collision, even in geological ages, is perhaps 
excessively remote; but in indefinitely prolonged 
time collision appears certain. It must be remem- 
bered, in addition, that the stars that are seen may 
well be but a small fraction of the whole system; 
and with each addition of dark suns the probability 
of collision becomes more than proportionately 
greater. 

Regarding, however, the rejuvenescence of a star 
by collision as possible, the last catastrophe is but 
projected forward by a finite time. At each collision 
the coalescence of a pair of cosmic masses will 
reduce the existing number by one; while energy 
of heat is gained at the expense of energy of motion. 
As ason succeeds ason, and as new nebulas follow 
those from the ruins of which they were formed into 
extinction, the Universe becomes poorer in active 
energy; and there appears, so far as physical 
science has interpreted the processes of nature, no 
escape from the picture of an accumulation of inert 
matter as the last memorial of a glorious Universe 
of Suns. 



(M520) 



50 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

Appendix to Chapter I. 
The Measurement of Stellar Distances. 

Bessel's discovery of stellar parallax, a discovery 
that directly demonstrated the fact of the Earth's 
annual motion round the Sun, has been generally 
regarded as the first direct proof of the truth of 
the Copernican System of Astronomy; though with- 
out doubt a very strong case for priority in this 
respect might be made out for the detection by 
Bradley, rather more than a century previously, of 
the aberration of light. In any case, however, 
Bessel's achievement removed the last and a very 
serious objection to the Copernican Hypothesis 
however firmly established, and has rendered it in 
every respect unassailable. The discovery itself 
must take high rank among the greatest triumphs 
of observation. The mere detection of so minute 
an angle as even the relatively large parallax of 
61 Cygni still necessitates instrumental means of 
extreme refinement, as well as very great observa- 
tional skill. Two lines inclined at an angle of a 
second of arc would approach by no more than 
i inch in a distance of 3^ miles, and the inclina- 
tion, not only detected by Bessel, but measured 
with considerable accuracy, was but a fraction 
of this. If the smallness of the angles con- 
cerned were the only difficulty in observations of 
stellar parallax, its detection would be no mean 
feat; but the observations are affected by numerous 



The Measurement of Stellar Distances. 51 

sources of error, the elimination of which involves 
the utmost perseverance. The necessary observa- 
tions must, of course, be made at widely separated 
times of the year, and difference of temperature not 
unfrequently causes change in the form and the 
position of the observing telescope, that would, if 
not taken into account, completely conceal the 
insignificant angle of parallax by simply over- 
whelming it. From a principle similar to that by 
which the rain-drops of a falling shower appear to 
slant towards a moving passenger to an extent 
dependent upon the rapidity of his motion, light 
rays arriving from a star appear to an observer 
upon the moving Earth as he is carried by it in 
its orbital rush across their streams to slant from 
the direction of the Earth's motion, and the star 
appears, in consequence, to be displaced toward 
that point in the heavens to which the Earth's 
motion is at the time directed. The phenomenon 
is known as " aberration of light"; it was indeed 
discovered by Bradley in 1725 during an unsuc- 
cessful attempt to detect the parallax of a star, and 
the displacement in the apparent position of a star 
due to it varies from nothing to 20 seconds of arc 
according to the direction of the Earth's motion 
with respect to that of the star. In estimating the 
true direction of a star from its apparent place in 
the sky it is obviously necessary to take the most 
careful account of the aberration of light. 

The apparent position of a star is also seriously 
affected by refraction. In accordance with the 
general fact that a ray of light is deflected, or 



52 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

refracted, in passing from a medium into another 
differing from it in density, the refraction being to- 
wards the perpendicular to the separating surface as 
the ray passes from a rarer into a denser medium, 
the rays from a star, after following a straight course 
in external space, are deflected downwards on enter- 
ing the atmosphere, and as the air continually in- 
creases in density as the surface of the Earth is 
approached, the deflection continually increases, so 
that the ray reaches an observer after executing a 
curve in the atmosphere, and the apparent direction 
of the star, determined by the direction of the ray 
on entering the eye, is sensibly different from its 
true direction. Unlike the interference caused by 
aberration, which may be corrected from an exact 
knowledge of the speed of the Earth relatively to 
that of light, the error due to refraction is incapable 
of exact determination, since the curvature of the 
ray is dependent upon the density, temperature, 
and degree of moisture of the air, not only in the 
observatory, but throughout the whole of its atmos- 
pheric path, which is quite beyond the reach of 
observation. 

With a view of minimizing, and avoiding as far 
as possible, these and certain other sources of error, 
Bessel adopted in his observations upon 61 Cygni 
a method originally proposed by Galileo, and 
known as that of " relative parallaxes". In it no 
attempt was made to determine the absolute direc- 
tion of the star with exactitude, but its direction was 
determined with a very high degree of accuracy 
with reference to a neighbouring " reference star", 



The Measurement of Stellar Distances. 53 

and the observations were repeated at different 
times of the year. The important assumption was 
then made, and its justification will be examined 
presently, that the reference star was so extremely 
remote that the direction in which it was seen was 
not appreciably af- 
fected by the Earth's , 
movement in other / / / 
words, that it pos- / I'' / 
sessed no parallax ;' // / 
that could be detected / /' / / 
its apparent proxi- / / 
mity to the star under / / 
observation being 
merely the result of 
its lying by chance 
nearly in the same 
direction. The prin- 
ciple underlying the 
application of the ob- 

Servations will be clear Fig. 3. Relative Parallax. 

from the diagram of 

fig. 3. Let the two parallel lines PC and QD represent 
the lines of sight from the earth in its two positions P 
and Q to the reference star, assumed to be so remote 
that there is no inclination between them capable of 
detection. Then, the Earth being at P, let the direc- 
tion of the star under examination be observed with 
reference to the reference star, by measuring the 
angle between them. Setting off this angle in the 
figure as CPA, the direction of the star is determined 
by the straight line PA. Six months later, the 




54 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

Earth being at Q, a similar observation may be 
made ; if the angle separating the stars be observed, 
and set off as DQB, the direction of the star is now 
indicated by the straight line QB. The inclination 
of PA and QB determine the position of the star at 
their meeting point at s. It need scarcely be re- 
marked that in actual practice the position and 
distance of the star are determined by trigonometrical 
calculations based upon the observed angles, and 
not from graphical construction such as has been 
here introduced to illustrate the principle involved. 
The instrument that has so far been found best 
adapted to the measurement of the required angles 
is known as the heliometer, from the fact of its 
having been originally designed to determine the 
angular measure of the Sun's diameter; and it was 
with such an instrument, constructed by the cele- 
brated optician Fraunhofer of Munich, that Bessel's 
observations were made. The heliometer is a 
telescope, the object-glass of which is cut into two 
along a diameter. With the two halves in their 
normal positions each may be regarded as giving 
a separate image of an object towards which the 
instrument is directed, but the pair of images 
coincide, and under these conditions the heliometer 
is equivalent to an ordinary telescope. If, however, 
one of the halves is displaced by sliding it along 
the line dividing the pair, the image formed by 
it is equally displaced, and the observer at the 
common eye-piece sees all objects in the field of 
view doubled, as if viewed through a crystal of 
Iceland-spar. In practice one half of the object- 



The Measurement of Stellar Distances. 55 

glass is displaced until the image of the star under 
observation for parallax formed by it coincides with 
the image of the reference star formed by the other. 
The amount of displacement between the two halves 
of the object-glass then indicates the angle between 
the directions of the stars. 

The advantage, as well as the one grave dis- 
advantage, inherent in the method of relative 
parallaxes will be clear upon consideration. The 
angles CPA and DQB are not appreciably affected by 
aberration, since, the pair of stars under observation 
lying in nearly the same direction in space, their 
rays will traverse closely coincident paths, and the 
apparent change in their direction caused by the 
Earth's rushing across the streams of light rays will 
be therefore nearly the same for each. For a similar 
reason, error due to refraction is practically eli- 
minated, since the rays from the two stars traverse 
nearly the same column of atmosphere, and are 
therefore refracted by it almost equally. 

It is important to notice that it is not necessary 
to know the absolute directions of the stars with 
great accuracy. So long as PC and QD, the lines of 
sight to the reference star, may be regarded as 
parallel, a displacement of the pair of them to and 
fro even through several degrees makes quite an 
insignificant change in the estimated distance of the 
star at s. It would be instructive to verify this by 
repeating the construction for directions of these 
lines slightly different to those in the figure, being 
careful to represent them as parallel in every case, 
and to retain the exact values of the angles CPA 



56 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

and DQB, which are those determined by the helio- 
meter. 

The one serious and obvious objection to the 
method of relative parallaxes lies in the necessity 
for assuming that the reference star is so remote 
that its parallax is inappreciable. It will be readily 
seen, by modifying the construction of the figure, 
that if the lines of sight to the reference star are 
inclined to each other, the distance of the star s will 
be underestimated. The justification for the method 
may perhaps be stated in some such way as the 
following. The enormous majority of the stars 
show no parallax relatively to each other that can 
be detected. This must arise, either from all such 
stars being so immensely remote that their paral- 
laxes are represented by angles so small as to be 
beyond the power of appreciation even by the helio- 
meter; or, if the stars are so near the Earth that 
these angles are appreciable, from their all being 
equally remote, so that all experience equal apparent 
displacements when regarded from different points 
of the Earth's orbit. There can be no hesitation in 
regarding the first alternative as overwhelmingly 
probable. There is, therefore, a great probability 
that any given star selected is sufficiently remote 
for its parallax to be ignored in its use as a refer- 
ence star; and if concordant results are obtained 
from the employment of two reference stars, which 
should always be the case for the work to inspire 
confidence, the probability of the soundness of the 
assumption becomes overwhelming. 

Before the application by Bessel of the method of 



The Measurement of Stellar Distances. 57 

relative parallaxes, the attempt had generally been 
made to determine the absolute direction of the star 
under observation for parallax by recording its 
position upon the face of the heavens without the 
assistance of reference stars. The position of the 
star was determined by the observation of its "right 
ascension" and " declination", celestial quantities 
quite analogous to longitude and latitude upon the 
surface of the Earth. Such a method is known as 
that of "absolute parallaxes", and it is preferable to 
the relative method in that it does not involve the 
aid of reference stars. Owing, however, to observa- 
tions by the absolute method being affected to the 
fullest extent by refraction, aberration, and other 
troubles, as well as from its involving the measure- 
ment of large angles, which are far more difficult 
of determination within the same limits of absolute 
error than small ones, the possibility of its success- 
ful application, even to the mere detection of paral- 
lax, in any given case, is so extremely remote that 
it has now been universally rejected. It is true, 
Henderson's discovery of the large parallax of a 
Centauri was effected by the absolute method, but 
success could be scarcely anticipated with paral- 
laxes of much smaller value. 

Bessel's success was therefore largely due to the 
adoption by him of the method of relative parallaxes, 
as well as to the fact of his being in command of a 
fine heliometer. It was also largely due to the 
judicious selection of a star for examination. Pre- 
vious to Bessel's measurements there was reason for 
regarding is as probable that 61 Cygni was one of 



58 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

the nearest of the stars, and that it therefore pos- 
sessed a relatively large parallax. In appearance 
one of the most insignificant and unattractive of the 
stars, attention had been for some time directed to 
61 Cygni by reason of its rapid drift across the face 
of the sky. So great is this " proper motion" in its 
case that in 350 years the star would traverse a line 
in the heavens equal to that covered by the diameter 
of the Full Moon, a rapidity of movement exceeded, 
so far as is known, only by two other stars. Since, 
other conditions remaining the same, the nearer a 
moving star the more rapidly would it appear to 
drift across the sky, it is evidently probable that 
the more rapidly drifting stars are as a class nearer 
than the others; hence in the search after the 
parallaxes of stars special attention has been 
directed to them, and 61 Cygni specially attracted 
the attention of Bessel. Another criterion of pro- 
bable nearness is supplied by brightness, it being 
a priori probable that the brighter stars are nearer 
the Earth than fainter, and for this reason special 
attention has also been devoted to them. It is inter- 
esting to notice that in the result rapidity of motion 
has proved a far more favourable omen of success 
in the search after parallax than great brilliancy. 



The Milky Way and Star Distribution. 59 

Chapter II. 
The Milky Way and the Distribution of Stars. 

Among the many and profound problems sug- 
gested to the mind by the contemplation of the 
heavens upon a clear, moonless night, there is no 
one more mysterious, and few have proved more 
baffling, than that presented by the dimly-luminous 
arch of the Milky Way. Variously regarded in 
classical mythology as the milk that flowed from 
the sacred breast of Juno; as the last vestige of 
the ruin that overwhelmed Phaeton in his bold but 
fatal attempt to direct the fiery steeds of the Sun's 
chariot; and as the road along which the gods 
repaired to High Olympus; the fair shimmer of 
the Milky Way has through succeeding ages been 
associated with poetic fancy and romantic imagina- 
tion. In modern German the popular term "Jacob- 
strasse" recalls not unfitly the sublime vision of the 
patriarch of Israel ; while to the Indian of North 
America the Milky Way is still the path of departed 
souls, and the brighter stars that stud its stream are 
the camp-fires that mark the halting-places of his 
fathers upon their weary march. 

From a very early date there have been recorded 
speculations of a more or less scientific nature re- 
garding the Milky Way. Pythagoras is recorded 
to have formed the shrewd conjecture that its faint 
shimmer was due to the accumulated light of multi- 
tudes of faint stars. Anaxagoras maintained the 



60 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

view that the appearance might be caused by the 
projection into space of the shadow of the Earth ; 
while Aristotle regarded it as a mist formed by the 
exhalation of terrestrial vapours. That it was a 
ring of nebulous matter in external space encircling 
the Earth appeared the probably correct solution 
to both Tycho Brahe and John Kepler toward the 
close of the sixteenth century ; but a few years later 
its true character was revealed in Galileo's telescope, 
and the speculation of Pythagoras was confirmed in 
the discovery that its haze is indeed the combined 
shimmer of hosts of stars, each one too faint by 
itself to be distinguished by the unaided eye. 

Seen under the most favourable conditions from 
these latitudes, the Milky Way appears as a semi- 
circular arch of light spanning the starlit sky. 
The appearance suggests that what is seen is the 
visible half of a complete zone encircling the 
heavens, the other half being at the time of obser- 
vation in the celestial hemisphere that is hidden 
by the solid Earth under foot. On constructing a 
complete map of the Celestial Sphere, and tracing 
the course of the Milky Way upon it, it is seen that 
this view is roughly correct; but the entire stream 
departs from a simple zone-like character in several 
respects. For about two-thirds of its circuit of the 
heavens, the Milky Way, though irregular, appears 
as an unbroken stream. In the constellation of the 
Swan, however, it bifurcates, the divided branches, 
after following appreciably parallel tracts for about 
one hundred degrees, reuniting in the constellation 
of the Centaur. The division in the Swan is excel- 



The Milky Way and Star Distribution. 61 

lently situated for observation from these latitudes, 
from which, however, the reunion in the Centaur 
is, owing to its proximity to the South Pole of the 
heavens, permanently invisible. The luminosity of 
the more northerly of the branches of the divided 
stream fades at a short distance from the bifurcation 
in the Swan, and, indeed, ceases for some distance, 
while it is very remarkable that this fading is 
accompanied by an increased brilliance in the 
southern branch. That the branches, though separ- 
ated, are not physically independent is indicated 
by the existence of imperfect bridges of luminous 
matter between them, while in several points the 
more southern and brighter branch throws off com- 
paratively brilliant projections toward its companion, 
which projections, however, terminate before reach- 
ing it. 

A few degrees from the permanent reunion of its 
divided streams, and upon entering the constellation 
of the Southern Cross, the course of the Milky Way 
expands into a brilliant and well-defined cloud of 
stars, while, in the centre of the cloud, closely bor- 
dering upon the four bright stars of the Cross, is 
the dark pear-shaped lake popularly known as the 
" Coal Sack ". The " Coal Sack " is one of a great 
number of similar irregularities in the Milky Way, 
though in no other is the passage from extreme 
richness in stars to almost total vacuity so sudden. 
The appearance of a dark void, unthinkable in ex- 
tent, in the midst of a cloud resplendent with the 
light of tens of thousands of suns, is indeed one of 
the most impressive features presented by the system 



62 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

of the stars, and it is scarcely remarkable that no 
explanation of it has been advanced that it is not 
easy to refute upon the most elementary grounds. 

A third and no less remarkable feature of the 
Milky Way is presented in the same region of the 
heavens. Following the course of the Milky Way 
past the Coal Sack, its stream contracts, becoming 
almost at once reduced to little more than a narrow 
neck of light. Beyond this, however, it as rapidly 
widens, and a few degrees farther on, in the con- 
stellation of Argo, it is broken clear across by a 
dark chasm. In Sir John Herschel's beautiful 
drawing of the Milky Way in the Southern Hemi- 
sphere the stream upon either side of the gap is 
shown as extending finger-like projections of faint 
light towards the opposite side, as if in vain en- 
deavours to bridge across some invisible barrier, 
while in Gould's more recent drawing, executed at 
Cordova, multitudes of faint stars are represented as 
scattered over the break. 

There is but little direct evidence as to the distance 
of the Milky Way. It is conceivable that the dis- 
tance of a portion of the Milky Way might be re- 
vealed in observations for parallax made upon a 
star, apparently lying in its stream while actually 
situated far beyond. In such a case, if a number of 
Milky- Way stars showed the same relative parallax 
with reference to the selected star, it would follow 
that the members of the group were at the same 
distance from the Earth, and if the parallax of the 
selected star were inappreciable, which would be 
probable if other selected stars, similarly examined 



The Milky Way and Star Distribution. 63 

with proper precautions, gave the same result, the 
distance of the Milky- Way stars would be deter- 
mined. No such effect as this has, however, been 
observed, and there can be little doubt that the 
Milky Way is more remote than at least many of 
the stars whose parallaxes have been determined. 
There is, however, no known reason why the method 
should not be successfully applied in the future. 

At a first casual glance the stream of the Milky 
Way appears to be of a uniformly diffused lumi- 
nosity throughout. Upon more careful inspection, 
however, the first suggestion of uniformity dis- 
appears, and a vast amount of varied and intricate 
structure becomes revealed throughout the entire 
system. Some of this detail is readily apparent to 
the naked eye upon a clear moonless night; but, to 
appreciate it in its full beauty, the keenest sight, 
supplemented by the most favourable conditions, is 
essential. Such conditions involve, of course, a 
moonless night; a highly transparent atmosphere; 
a time when, as is admirably the case in the autumn 
and winter evenings, the Milky Way extends high 
into the vault of heaven, so that the greater part of 
it escapes the effects of light absorption by the 
atmosphere, always so appreciable when viewing 
celestial objects low down towards the horizon ; and 
a locality well removed from sources of artificial 
light, and the consequent glare that they produce in 
the sky. 

As the eye, under such conditions, becomes more 
and more accustomed to its faint light, the uniform 
luminosity at first suggested by the Milky Way 



64 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

becomes replaced by details of structure steadily 
emerging from its haze, until the whole stream 
spanning the sky assumes an entirely new signifi- 
cation. Consisting in some parts of clouds of faint 
stars, separated by connected dark or dusky rifts; 
in others, of wisps of starry matter, sometimes inter- 
lacing in inextricable maze over the body of the 
stream itself, and frequently projected as delicate 
streamers far into the neighbouring sky; the whole 
appearance of the Milky Way has suggested, not 
inaptly, the image of the knotted and gnarled trunk 
of an old forest tree. The interpretation of the 
scheme thus dimly unfolded may be beyond our 
power, but in surveying it, the observer becomes 
powerfully impressed with the conviction, that rather 
than being a fortuitous concourse of suns, the Milky 
Way is a system possessing a complicated and 
varied structure. 

The telescopic appearance of many regions of the 
Milky Way is of extreme beauty, and structure is 
revealed of a more minute character; that appreci- 
able to the unaided eye being not unfrequently lost 
owing to the limited area of the sky that it is possible 
to embrace in one view. Appearing in some regions 
as a collection of individual stars scattered apparently 
at random over the dark background of the sky ; in 
others as clouds of innumerable stars, which as his 
telescope moved, suggested to Sir John Herschel 
the image of a drifting scud ; while not unfrequently 
its hosts of stars appear as if involved in extensive 
nebulosity; the Milky Way, when viewed through 
a fine instrument of large light-grasping power, 



The Milky Way and Star Distribution. 65 

presents a picture, as its "clusters and bee-like 
swarms of stars" drift in silent procession across the 
field of view, that is in the highest degree impres- 
sive. To the true star-gazer, the whole picture 
possesses an inexpressible and quiet charm, and 
suggests thoughts to which few would find it easy 
to give expression. 

During the past twenty years the invention of the 
gelatine dry plate, and the continual improvements 
effected in its preparation, have placed a new method 
of research, and one of tremendous power, at the 
disposal of the astronomer. It is now a matter of 
common knowledge that, in its power of recording 
very faint light, the photographic plate far surpasses 
eye observation, for the simple reason that, to be 
appreciated by the eye at all, an object must be of 
a certain brightness ; but that the effect of light upon 
the photographic plate being cumulative, a percep- 
tible image may be produced by light far below the 
limit of visibility to the eye, if its action upon the 
plate be allowed to continue for a sufficiently long 
time. It is consequently in the representations of 
extremely faint objects, such as the nebulas and the 
streams of the Milky Way, that photography has 
achieved its greatest triumphs in this direction. 

In its application to astronomy, the photographic 
plate is usually placed within a telescope from which 
all lenses, with the exception of the object-glass, 
have been removed; and at a distance behind the 
object-glass equal to its focal length. Under these 
conditions a sharply-defined image of the celestial 
object towards which the telescope is directed is 

( M 520 ) B 



66 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

formed by the object-glass upon the plate. In some 
of the most beautiful studies of the Milky Way, 
however, a portrait lens and a camera closely re- 
sembling the usual form have been substituted for 
the telescope. Larger pictures are obtained by the 
former method, but the latter embraces a larger field 
of view and is the more sensitive. It is scarcely 
necessary to add that, in either method, the entire 
instrument must be mounted appropriately and 
driven by clockwork so as to accurately follow the 
celestial object in its apparent diurnal revolution 
round the Earth. 

Of the applications of the photographic plate to 
the study of the minute detail of the Milky Way it 
will only be necessary to refer to the beautiful work 
of Mr. Barnard at the Lick Observatory. From 
the glorious situation of the observatory upon 
Mount Hamilton, under conditions nearly perfect, 
so far as atmospheric transparency is concerned; 
with 11,000 feet, and that the most troublesome 
portion, of the atmosphere below, Mr. Barnard, 
using a portrait lens of only 6 inches in aper- 
ture, and exposing the plates for periods varying 
from one to twelve hours, has obtained a series of 
pictures of the Milky Way of the utmost beauty 
and delicacy. It is scarcely too much to say that 
the pictures as far surpass, in the amount of detail 
revealed, the view presented to the eye through the 
largest telescope, as does the latter the result of 
naked-eye observation; though it must be con- 
fessed that the point-like images and the brilliancy 
of the star pictures, both of which add so greatly 



The Milky Way and Star Distribution. 67 

to the beauty of the telescopic view, are lost in the 
photograph. 

It is impossible to examine the exquisite photo- 
graphs obtained by Mr. Barnard, even superficially, 
without being impressed with the sense that over 
enormous regions of the Milky Way, of a space so 
vast that in comparison with them the whole of the 
Solar System would shrink to utter insignificance, 
influences have been at work, concerning the very 
nature of which it is only possible to form the 
vaguest conjecture. The most striking features are 
perhaps the dark lanes or rifts that so frequently 
appear to intersect clouds of stars. These rifts 
seldom occur in isolation ; they more generally form 
branching systems, many branches frequently 
radiating from a common trunk or other apparent 
vacuity. In some cases the rifts are dark, with 
sharply-defined edges, and are nearly, or quite, 
devoid of stars : in others, they are uniformly hazy, 
as if viewed through an interposed star cloud: 
while, again, they appear of dusky and less regular 
forms that have suggested the view of dark clouds 
of cosmic dust lying between the Earth and a more 
distant background of brilliant stars. Another very 
suggestive feature in the minute structure of the 
Milky Way is the frequent occurrence in it of stars 
arranged in lines. The lines of stars are frequently 
simple, but they often assume curved and branch- 
ing forms, and a very general characteristic is 
shown in their tendency to arrangement in direc- 
tions roughly parallel to dark rifts in the same 
region. A remarkable case is supplied in the 



68 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

constellation of Sagittarius, where Mr. Barnard's 
photograph shows a group of upwards of thirty 
small stars arranged in the form of a forked twig, 
the end of the twig remote from the fork being 
sharply curved round into a hook. In the imme- 
diate neighbourhood of this group, and generally 
parallel to it, are several well-marked, dark, and 
dusky rifts. In many cases physical relationship 
between stars thus arranged is emphasized by the 
occurrence of streams and wreaths of nebulous 
matter connecting and involving the stars. Star 
streams also frequently assume the form of closed 
oval curves, the included space being commonly 
darker than the exterior. 

The question whether the Milky Way is an 
isolated structure in space, or whether it is related 
in any recognizable matter to the system of the 
stars, is one that has given rise to much study and 
speculation during the last hundred years. To- 
wards the close of the last century Sir William 
Herschel noticed that, although the stars were dis- 
tributed over the face of the sky with great irregu- 
larity, there was upon the whole a decided tendency 
to increased density in their distribution towards 
the region of the Milky Way. Confining his 
attention, by reason of the extended nature of the 
problem, to a zone of moderate width intersecting 
the Milky Way at right angles, and directing his 
reflecting telescope of i8 7 / IO -inch aperture towards 
every part, in succession, of more than one-half of 
it, upwards of three thousand observations were 
made of the number of stars visible at any one time 



The Milky Way and Star Distribution. 69 

in the field of view. The area of sky embraced in 
any one view was nearly one-quarter of that covered 
by the Full Moon, and, taking the average density 
of star distribution for equal distances from the 
Milky Way, it appeared that fewest stars appeared 
at a distance of 90 degrees from it, and that the 
number continually increased as its stream was 
approached. In equal steps of 15 degrees each 
from the poles of the Milky Way to its middle 
plane the average numbers of stars visible in the 
field of view were 4, 5, 8, 14, 24, and 53. 

In recent years the crowding of stars towards the 
zone of the Milky Way has been examined in a 
more detailed manner. Herschel was content to 
merely count the total number visible at any one 
time through his telescope, ignoring any distinction 
as regards brightness between the stars themselves. 
In 1870 Mr. Proctor showed, by counting the num- 
ber of lucid stars, i.e. those visible to the naked 
eye, that a similar crowding was recognizable with 
respect to them ; and still later Mr. Gore has shown 
that a similar crowding can be traced in stars of 
each individual magnitude, taken separately. Fur- 
ther, a remarkable law of crowding becomes ap- 
parent in treating the problem in this manner. 
With the brightest of the stars the crowding to the 
Milky Way is very marked, so much so that, as 
Mr. Proctor has remarked, upon a moonlit night, 
when the Milky Way is itself invisible, it is still 
possible to trace its course, at any rate in the 
Southern Hemisphere, by the track marked by the 
brilliant stars. With descending steps in brilliancy 



70 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

the crowding of the stars becomes, however, less 
emphasized ; for stars just upon the limit of vision 
it is scarcely recognizable, while for telescopic stars 
just below that limit it practically vanishes. For 
still fainter stars, however, the crowding is again 
apparent, and continues to become more and more 
pronounced until the faintest of the telescopic stars 
are reached. 

It is easy as well as interesting to trace this 
remarkable law of distribution in the positions of 
the brightest stars. Of the ten most brilliant stars 
of the northern hemisphere, three Capella, Altair, 
and Alpha Cygni are situated very near to the 
central line of the Milky Way, though its entire 
stream does not occupy more than one-seventh of 
the hemisphere. Four others Vega, Procyon, 
Betelgeux, and Aldebaran are placed upon its im- 
mediate border, and all have been thought to be 
involved in its faint extensions. A zone embracing 
four-fifths of the sky, with the Milky Way in its 
middle plane, contains, in addition to these seven, 
the eighth, Pollux, that is, exactly twice as many 
stars as it should if the distribution had been uni- 
form. Two only of the ten, Regulus and Arcturus, 
are far removed from the Milky Way, and it is 
suggestive that of this pair, Arcturus is notorious 
by reason of its very high proper motion, or drift, 
across the face of the sky ; one that is only exceeded 
in magnitude by eighteen other stars. It is quite 
conceivable that an enormous speed might enable 
a star to resist a tendency to distribution to which 
less rapidly moving bodies would conform. 



The Milky Way and Star Distribution. 71 

From the remarkable law of star distribution 
traced by Herschel and later observers, it appears 
scarcely possible to regard the Milky Way as an 
independent and isolated formation ; while a definite 
relation between it and other celestial objects is still 
further emphasized by a study of the distribution of 
the nebulas in space. In the course of his researches 
upon these celestial clouds Sir William Herschel 
became aware of a curious antipathy displayed by 
them towards the brighter stars. He continually 
found groups of nebulas in spaces of the heavens 
comparatively destitute of stars, and separated from 
the richer regions around them by dark spaces. So 
firmly did he become impressed with the reality of 
this relationship of avoidance, that, during the 
process of " sky sweeping", as his great telescope 
was directed toward different regions of the heavens, 
he was accustomed to warn his assistant to prepare 
to record nebulas, for, by the thinning out of stars, 
he anticipated that he was approaching nebulous 
ground. He observed that the crowded stream of 
the Milky Way was almost destitute of nebulas, 
but that toward its poles, where stars were most 
sparsely distributed, nebulas appeared in greatest 
number. The avoidance of the Milky Way dis- 
played by nebulas was still further emphasized in 
the observations of Sir John Herschel, who extended 
his father's researches into the Southern Hemi- 
sphere. 

The avoidance of the zone of the Milky Way 
displayed by nebulas, and their condensation toward 
its poles, may be very strikingly shown by con- 



72 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

structing a map of the heavens, upon which the 
positions of the nebulae and that of the stream of 
the Milky Way are recorded. Such maps have 
been frequently made, the most recent being by the 
late Mr. Sydney Waters, who in 1893 marked, upon 
the method known as that of " equal surface pro- 
jection ", the positions of the 7840 nebulae and star 
clusters recorded in Dr. Dreyer's New General 
Catalogue of 1888. In view of the fact that at a 
not very remote date the belief was generally enter- 
tained that nebulae were clusters of stars, it is in- 
teresting to notice the relationship displayed by star 
clusters towards the Milky Way. Their condensa- 
tion toward it is even more pronounced than that of 
the stars, very few being found beyond the limits 
of the Milky Way, while for a considerable part of 
its course the centre of its stream is occupied by a 
continuous line of them. 

The application of the spectroscope to the study 
of the nebulae has brought to light a curious modi- 
fication of their law of distribution. We have seen 
in the previous chapter that many of the nebulae, by 
yielding a broken spectrum, are thereby demon- 
strated, at any rate so far as their luminous con- 
stituents are concerned, to be in a gaseous condition, 
but that the light from others yields a continuous 
spectrum, which is at present incapable of exact 
interpretation. On examining the manner in which 
these two classes of nebulae are distributed in the 
heavens, it appears that the "gaseous" nebulae share 
the tendency towards condensation displayed by 
stars in crowding towards the Milky Way, the 



The Milky Way and Star Distribution. 73 

greater number of nebulas actually appearing in it 
being gaseous. Upon deducting these from the 
total number, and mapping the positions of the re- 
mainder, the avoidance of the Milky Way displayed 
by them is consequently more pronounced than 
before. 

In following the steps by which structure has been 
traced throughout the entire stream of the Milky 
Way, and system revealed in the distribution of the 
stars and nebulae with reference to it and to each 
other, we have so far followed a sure course, and 
indeed have had occasion to do little more than 
record the results of direct observation. That stars 
and nebulae are not scattered at random throughout 
space, that there is law in their manner of distribu- 
tion upon the face of the sky, and that with this law 
the stream of the Milky Way is in some manner 
intimately associated, cannot be doubted. So much 
is known ; and it is scarcely possible to refrain from 
the attempt to gain some closer insight into the 
nature and meaning of the entire system. Here, 
however, our steps at once follow a less certain 
track, and rapidly lead toward a region of specula- 
tion in which not a few sound thinkers have become 
sadly bewildered. 

In 1784 Sir William Herschel, adopting in prin- 
ciple a suggestion advanced by Thomas Wright of 
Durham thirty-five years earlier, attempted to ac- 
count for the appearance of the Milky Way, and the 
condensation of stars toward it, as a perspective 
effect. According to this view, all stars, including 
those that appear to form the Milky Way, were 



74 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

assumed to be, upon a broad average, uniformly 
distributed in a stratum or layer, the thickness of 
which was small in comparison with its dimen- 
sions in its own plane; while the Sun was situ- 
ated not far from the centre of the stratum. It 
is clear that according to such a law of distribution 
the line of sight from the Solar System directed at 
right angles to the stratum would soon emerge into 
external space, and that but few stars would appear 
in this direction; but that in all directions parallel 
to the faces of the stratum stars would appear to be 
crowded, since the line of vision would be, in all 
these directions, for a long distance involved among 
stars. All round the Solar System, in the middle 
plane of the stratum, stars would, therefore, appear 
to be crowded, and by such perspective effect the 
appearance of the Milky Way was imagined to be 
produced. In passing from a direction along to 
one at right angles to the stratum, the length of the 
line of sight included in it would continually de- 
crease, and fewer and fewer stars would therefore be 
seen toward the poles of the Milky Way. It was 
further suggested that the bifurcation of the Milky 
Way was an optical effect, due to the projection from 
the principal stratum of a secondary one, making 
a small angle with it, and leaving it nearly in the 
direction of a straight line passing from the Sun. 

If the stars were distributed with perfect uniformity 
throughout space, and if the most distant and the 
faintest were visible through a given telescope, it 
would of course be possible, by counting the num- 
bers visible in equal areas of the heavens, to compare 



The Milky "Way and Star Distribution. 75 

the extensions of the system of the stars in the cor- 
responding directions. For a time Herschel believed 
that these conditions were fulfilled with sufficient 
approach to accuracy to justify the application of 
the method; and, with a view of " fathoming the 
Universe " in this manner, he carried out a laborious 
series of " star-gages ", his telescope being directed 
successively to upwards of 3000 selected regions of 
the heavens, and the number of stars in each field of 
view counted. The results were published in 1785. 
It follows from simple geometry, that if the stars 
are distributed uniformly, and if the telescope em- 
ployed is sufficiently powerful to reveal all of them, 
the extension of the system in different directions is 
proportional to the cube root of the number of stars 




Fig. 4. Sir William Herschel's earlier view regarding the Form of 
the Stellar Universe. 

appearing in equal areas of the heavens in those 
directions; and upon this principle Herschel con- 
structed the familiar hypothetical section of the 
sidereal system which is reproduced in fig. 4. In 
this the Solar System occupies the position indicated 
by the point s, the straight line SA is directed rather 
to the north of Sirius, and the great length of it in- 
volved among stars gives rise to an optical crowding 
to which the appearance of the Milky Way is as- 
cribed; the cleft upon the opposite side accounts 



76 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

upon the same principle for the apparent division of 
the Milky Way into two branches, the lines SB and 
sc, by fathoming the starry extensions shown in the 
section, giving rise to the bifurcation in the neigh- 
bourhood of Altair. 

To the reader, acquainted with the intricate struc- 
ture of the Milky Way revealed by more recent 
observation, it will be at once apparent how com- 
pletely at variance with nature was Herschel's as- 
sumption that its appearance could be due to any 
such merely optical effect; but it is difficult to 
imagine how, with the knowledge of star distribution 
that was the result of his own work, Herschel could 
have, even for a time, regarded his fundamental 
assumption of approximately uniform distribution 
as valid. To account for the Coal Sack and the 
other less-pronounced vacuities of the Milky Way 
upon the hypothesis of optical effect, vast cone-like 
tunnels must be imagined as converging upon the 
Solar System from the external void; while every 
appearance of exceptional richness must be re- 
garded as arising from immense columns of stars 
projecting from the system afar into external space, 
and similarly radiating from the Sun. As a 
centre of such converging tunnels of vacuity and 
radiating projections of starry cones, the Sun 
assumes a unique place in the Universe entirely 
without warrant. Upon the optical hypothesis, 
again, except upon similarly extravagant assump- 
tions, the appearance of crowding of stars towards 
and within the Milky Way should take place 
gradually. From the external sky to the centre of 



The Milky Way and Star Distribution. 77 

its stream, density of star distribution should in- 
crease continually and by such perfect gradation 
that it should be impossible to define the limits of 
the Milky Way. Such an effect is, however, directly 
contradicted by observation. Throughout its entire 
course the boundary of the Milky Way is generally 
marked with fair definition, while in some regions 
the transition from its star-crowded depths to the 
external sky is so abrupt that one half of the field of 
view of the telescope may be dark while the other 
half is crowded with its stars. Such features point 
definitely to the Milky Way being a real and definite 
structure, separate from, though doubtless in some 
way closely related to, external celestial bodies. 
That this conclusion is unavoidable was clearly 
recognized in his later life by Herschel himself, and 
was fully acknowledged by him, although, unfor- 
tunately, his earlier hypothesis was never formally 
withdrawn. 

Closely bearing upon the problem of the Milky 
Way and the relation of external objects to it, is 
the question whether the stars are distributed over 
a finite region, or whether they are scattered with- 
out limit through infinite space. In other words, 
is the visible universe finite or infinite in extent? 
Upon the random suppositions that stars are distri- 
buted uniformly and without limit through infinite 
space, and that all are of the same magnitude 
and of the same intrinsic brilliancy as the Sun, 
a very remarkable conclusion is reached, which is 
often quoted, and to which it is worth while to 
direct attention. With the Earth as centre, let an 



78 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

infinite number of concentric spherical surfaces be 
imagined in space having radii proportional to the 
natural numbers i, 2, 3, 4, &c., and let a certain 
number of stars be imagined to be distributed 
over the first surface. The second surface, having 
twice the radius of the first, will have four times 
the area, and will therefore contain, upon the 
hypothesis of uniform distribution, four times as 
many stars. Since, however, the apparent disc 
of each star would, at its doubled distance, be 
diminished in area to one-fourth, so far as regards 
their combined areas, the increased number of stars 
would exactly counterbalance the effect of their 
reduced discs, and the stars upon the second surface 
would cover the same extent of sky as those upon 
the first. By the same reasoning this would also 
be true of those upon the third, fourth, and every 
succeeding surface; so that, if the stars extend 
through space without limit, upon including a 
sufficient number of surfaces the whole face of the 
sky would at length be entirely covered by stars. 
Further, as the apparent brightness of an object 
does not diminish with its distance, unless its light 
undergoes absorption during its passage from the 
body to the eye, the whole vault of heaven would 
be both by day and by night resplendent with a 
dazzling brilliancy equal to that of the Sun itself 
except for a few black dots marking the positions 
of the interposed planets, and for a group of small 
dusky objects, spots upon the Sun, by which alone 
its position in the heavens would be apparent. 
The actual appearance of the heavens is so strik- 



The Milky Way and Star Distribution. 79 

ingly different from this that it is clear that the as- 
sumptions lying at the base of the deduction are 
very wide of the mark. 

With reference to this reasoning it must be 
noticed that the apparent brightness of a surface is 
independent of its distance, when, and only when, 
there is no absorption of light in its passage from 
the surface to the eye. If there is a general absorp- 
tion of light the argument fails. Less and less 
light would be received from increasingly distant 
spheres, and the combined light from all those 
beyond a certain distance, a distance depending upon 
the intensity of the absorption, would be a negli- 
gible quantity. 1 Absorption of light in interstellar 
space might result from imperfect transparency of 

1 The demonstration of this statement is comparatively simple. Suppose, 
as a concrete case, that in its passage from the nearest of the spherical sur- 
faces imagined in the argument to the eye, ^ of the light that would if 
there were no absorption reach the eye, is actually absorbed. Then if L 
represents the whole light that the eye would receive from the stars upon the 
first surface if there were no absorption, the light actually received from 
them would be ^ L. Consider next the light from the stars upon the second 
surface. Since the distance separating the surfaces is equal to that from 
the first surface to the eye ; of the light that would reach the first surface 
from the second on its way to the eye if there were no absorption % would 
escape absorption, while in its farther passage to the eye % of this would 
escape, the light arriving being therefore % of % L, or (%) 2 x L, since L 
is the same as before, the light received from each sphere upon the assump- 
tion of no absorption being the same. By similar reasoning the light 
received from stars on the third surface will be ( % )s L, and so on, the total 
being 



an infinite series of terms, the value of which, by the law of geometrical 
progression, continually approaches without limit, but can never exceed, 
2 L. That is, for this special value of absorption, the whole light from an 
infinite distribution of stars would be only double the amount that would be 
received from the stars on the nearest surface if there were no absorption. 



8o Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

the ether of space by which all radiation is trans- 
mitted, or from interposed dark matter in the form 
of dark stars, clouds of cosmic dust, or swarms of 
meteorites. It is perhaps too much to regard im- 
perfect transparency of the ether as inconceivable ; 
but should absorption in the ether occur, energy 
in some other form must appear equal in amount 
to that of the radiation absorbed, and no trace of 
any such developed energy has been detected. It 
has, however, been shown in a former chapter that 
the existence of dark matter in interstellar space 
is possible if not probable, both in the form of dark 
stars and as clouds of cosmic dust in the earliest 
stage of a nebula, while meteor swarms are an 
obvious fact. Light absorption might arise from 
all or any one of these causes, cosmic dust clouds 
appearing the most probably effective, so that the 
impossibility of an infinite distribution of stars can- 
not be demonstrated. The distribution is, however, 
clearly not uniform. 

In spite of the serious objections to the view that 
the density of star distribution upon the face of the 
heavens can be taken as an indication of the exten- 
sion of the sidereal system, Sir John Herschel, 
during his residence at the Cape between 1834 an< ^ 
1838, extended his father's method of star-gaging, 
and generally maintained the view that the appear- 
ance of the Milky Way is, at any rate in part, due 
to optical crowding. The comparatively abrupt 
limits of its stream led him, however, to modify 
Sir William Herschel's original theory, in assum- 
ing the stars to be distributed within the volume 



The Milky Way and Star Distribution. 81 

of a flat ring, indefinitely extended in all directions, 
the Solar System being imagined as situated near 
the centre of the hollow of the ring. By splitting 
the ring in its medial plane nearly to its centre, 
and slightly deflecting outward the divided portions, 
the appearance of the great fissure in the Milky 
Way was explained. The same fundamental con- 
ception underlies the modification suggested by 
Wilhelm Struve in 1847. According to this scheme 
the whole of the stars were distributed in parallel 
layers or strata, the strata being more and more 
densely crowded towards a central plane very nearly 
passing through the position of the Sun. Accord- 
ing to this view there was a real condensation of 
stars towards the central plane, which was ap- 
parently increased by the effect of optical crowding, 
the appearance of the Milky Way being the com- 
bined effect of the two causes. It was suggested, 
in addition, that absorption of light in space might 
reduce the last effect to within narrow limits. 

To these modifications of Sir William Herschel's 
first hypothesis the objections urged against it, 
though not so entirely overwhelming, are neverthe- 
less fatal. Both are equally inconsistent with the 
appearance of the Coal Sack and other vacuities, 
with the dark rifts, and with the minute detail 
revealed by later researches. According to each 
of them, the transition from greater to less density 
of distribution of stars beyond the limits of the 
Milky Way should be far more gradual and regular 
than it is. Star-crowding should become less and 
less pronounced in passing from the limits of the 

(M 520) F 



82 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

Milky Way towards its poles; but, in actual obser- 
vation, while this is found to be the case so far as 
the average of the stars is concerned, the law is 
very far from being maintained in isolated regions. 
Several regions of the sky in close proximity to the 
poles of the Milky Way are exceptionally rich in 
stars, while others, closely bordering upon its 
stream, are among the poorest in the heavens. 
The views of the two Herschels and Struve are 
alike untenable, and, since the publication of the 
last, they have failed to find support save in the 
pages of certain popular works on astronomy. 

The older "disc" and "strata" theories having 
been found wanting, the Milky Way has come to 
be generally regarded as a real formation, and 
attempts have been made to construct in imagination 
a stream of stars that should give rise to the appear- 
ance actually presented. It is obvious that, in 
its visible aspect, the Milky Way appears as the 
projection of all of its parts upon the background 
of the sky. Of the possible depth of the formation 
the eye takes no cognisance. Its many apparently 
confused and interlacing wreaths may be, in actual 
fact, entirely separate, some being projected inward 
toward the observer, while others may be thrown 
backward into the more remote spaces behind. 

In 1869 Mr. Proctor attempted to show that the 
chief features of the Milky Way, and more particu- 
larly the appearance of the three most pronounced 
irregularities, the Coal Sack, the bifurcation, and 
the great Break in Argo, might arise from the con- 
volutions of a single stream of stars. One of the 




The Milky Way and Star Distribution. 83 

diagrams accompanying his suggestion is repro- 
duced, with a slight modification in the arrangement 
of the lines of vision, in fig. 5. In this, the single 
stream of the Milky Way is represented as being 
somewhat fantas- 
tically curved, the 
ends being folded 
back upon the 
course of the main 
stream. The Solar 
System occupies 
the position indi- 
cated by the point 
s, and the line of 
sight s A, escap- 
ing into external 
space between the 
refolded portions of the stream, accounts for the 
appearance of the great Break. Close to the Break, 
in the direction SB, the two portions of the stream 
are optically superposed, and give rise to the bril- 
liant neck in Argo, while a little farther on one or 
both portions diverge from the median plane for a 
short distance, producing the supposed purely opti- 
cal effect of the Coal Sack in the direction s c. After 
a farther short distance through which the two por- 
tions continue superposed, and through which the 
stream consequently appears single, apparent divi- 
sion again occurs owing to a second divergence 
from the median plane, and continues until the 
branches reunite along SE in the constellation of the 
Swan. Of these apparent branches, one, the more 



Fig. 5. Mr. Proctor's suggested explanation 
of the Appearance of the Milky Way. 



84 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

northerly, fades and becomes for a time invisible by 
reason of excessive distance, while the other in- 
creases greatly in brilliancy owing to its nearness. 
From SE to SL the stream appears as it really is, 
single; but beyond SL, and extending to the great 
Break, the series of lakes or vacuities, which are 
a characteristic feature of the Milky Way in this 
region, are accounted for by repeated temporary 
deviations of the two portions from the median 
plane, as in the direction SK. 

Mr. Proctor's view of the formation of the Milky 
Way displays the ingenuity that would have been 
anticipated from so sagacious and original a thinker, 
but it is open to objections of so serious a nature as 
to render its acceptance impossible. It has been 
urged against it, that, since the brightness of an 
object does not diminish with increased distance, 
the fading away and ultimate disappearance of the 
northern of the two branches bifurcating in the 
Swan cannot be due to excessive remoteness. It 
has, however, been seen that the apparent bright- 
ness of an object is only independent of its distance 
if its light undergoes no absorption in space; and 
since such absorption has been shown to be possible, 
if not probable, a fatal attack upon Mr. Proctor's 
scheme cannot be maintained upon this ground. 
It is curious that Mr. Proctor himself makes no 
reference to this point, though he was beyond all 
doubt thoroughly familiar with the elementary law 
in question. A more serious objection to the sug- 
gested explanation lies in the fact that it is scarcely 
possible to regard the divided branches of the Milky 



The Milky Way and Star Distribution. 85 

Way as physically independent. For a consider- 
able distance from the division of the main stream 
in the Swan, the southern branch continues to cast 
off incipient streamers and bright projections toward 
its companion, and the same indication of intimate 
physical connection between the two is shown in 
the near neighbourhood of the reunion of the 
branches in the Centaur. It might seem probable 
that the varying apparent breadth of the Milky 
Way might serve as an indication of the proximity 
or remoteness of different parts of its stream ; but 
it is found that upon the whole the narrowest por- 
tions, which would otherwise appear to be the most 
remote, are the brightest, and it would be indeed 
difficult to regard enhanced brilliancy as generally 
associated with increased distance. 

The failure of these and other attempts to explain 
the appearance of the Milky Way, and of the irregu- 
larities displayed by it, as being primarily due to 
perspective effect or optical projection, point to the 
probability of the more simple and direct view, that 
the Milky Way is a definite and complicated struc- 
ture, and that its bifurcation, its vacuities, its gaps, 
and its other irregularities, are definite physical 
facts. To this view astronomers have now become 
reconciled. Adopting it, the sense of the overwhelm- 
ing mystery of the whole undoubtedly becomes 
greater, while it must be confessed, that something 
is gained in the rejection of schemes in which a 
rather painful suggestion of artificiality somewhat 
conflicts with the majesty of the problem toward the 
partial solution of which they have been directed. 



86 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

The crowding towards the zone of the Milky Way 
displayed by the naked -eye stars, and more par- 
ticularly by the brightest of them, suggests that their 
distribution in space has been controlled either by 
the Milky Way itself or by the influences to which 
it owes its being. Not only, however, is a general 
relation thus indicated between the external stars 
and the Milky Way, but it has been maintained, 
notably by Mr. Proctor and Mr. Cowper Ranyard, 
that there is evidence in many instances of a more 
direct and intimate relationship between separate 
stars and groups of stars and the Milky Way. The 
evidence consists in the arrangement of bright stars, 
both individually and in groups, with reference to 
structures in the Milky Way. While acknowledging 
that in some instances it is difficult to avoid a feel- 
ing of doubt that the arrangements in question 
may not be the results of chance distribution, it is 
scarcely possible not to recognize in others very 
strong evidence of intimate physical connection. 
It must be sufficient here to illustrate the general 
nature of the arguments adduced by reference to a 
few selected cases, referring the reader for a more 
complete discussion of this very intricate and deli- 
cate subject to more exhaustive works. 1 

The constellation of the Swan lies in the very 
heart of the Milky Way, in a region particularly 
interesting from the evidence of structure apparent 
in it both to the naked eye and in photographic 

1 The subject is developed in considerable detail in the chapter on ' ' The 
Stars " in The Old and New Astronomy, by Proctor and Ranyard ; and has 
formed the subject of a number of articles that have appeared in Knowledge 
during the past fifteen years. 



The Milky Way and Star Distribution. 87 

examination. Upon a photographic plate exposed 
for thirteen hours in the autumn of 1891 by Dr. 
Wolf of Heidelberg, accumulations of stars are 
shown of a richness unimaginable in the finest 
telescopic view, while throughout vast regions the 
stars appear to be involved in a faintly luminous 
cloud. This enveloping nebulosity is extensively 
furrowed by dark lanes and rifts, the borders 
of which are, in the manner so generally charac- 
teristic of them, emphasized by lines of faint 
stars. Conspicuous in Dr. Wolfs photograph are 
the images of the bright stars <* and 7 Cygni, the 
two that form the head and centre of the familiar 
cross of the Swan. Upon the photograph, both of 
these stars appear to be nebulous, their blurred 
images passing by insensible gradation into the 
surrounding cloud. It is true that a similar appear- 
ance is recognized to some extent in all photo- 
graphic pictures of bright stars; an extension of 
the photographic image being caused by the dis- 
persion of light from the point-like and brilliantly 
illuminated image of the star formed upon the 
sensitive plate during exposure into the sensitive 
silver compound around it, but here the want of 
definition of the images appears to be far more than 
could possibly be ascribed to this cause, and the 
unsymmetrical form of the haze by which 7 Cygni 
is enveloped makes it scarcely possible to accept 
such explanation of the appearance in its case. In 
addition, the position of a Cygni at the base of a 
remarkable shrub-like dark formation in the bright 
nebulosity, and that of 7 Cygni as the centre of 



88 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

several diverging nebulous structures, point strongly 
to a definite physical connection between both stars 
and the apparently surrounding masses. It appears, 
therefore, probable that the stars are actually bathed 
in the depths of the Milky Way in which they 
appear, and do not owe their appearance in it to the 
chance effect of optical projection upon it. 

The arrangement of many of the stars in the con- 
stellation Orion is very remarkable. The proba- 
bility against three such brilliant stars as those 
forming the belt falling in a straight line and 
appearing in such close proximity as the result of 
chance distribution is overwhelming. The close 
proximity of the Great Nebula of Orion, as well as 
the arrangement of many of its contained structures 
with reference to the direction assumed by the belt, 
is moreover suggestive ; as is also the fact that the 
belt is situated upon the immediate border of the 
Milky Way, to which it is very closely parallel. A 
group of five faint naked-eye stars lies immediately 
below the belt; they are arranged in a line parallel 
to it, and it is easy to imagine the line continued 
upwards and towards the west by a farther stream 
of five stars separated from the first by a short 
break and deflected northward towards the Milky 
Way. A little farther to the west a second stream 
of naked-eye stars, at least thirteen in number, 
leaves the constellation in a westward direction, 
becoming in like manner deflected to the north and 
actually penetrating the Milky Way. Both of these 
star streams are represented in a beautiful drawing 
of the Milky Way as seen by the naked eye, re- 



The Milky Way and Star Distribution. 89 

cently executed by Dr. Boeddicker, as involved in 
its cloudy extensions. To the last point it may, 
however, be urged with considerable force, that the 
appearance of a faint nebulous stream connecting 
the members of a line of faint stars may be an 
optical illusion, and the failure of the photographic 
plate to verify the existence of the cloudy stream 
indicated by Dr. Boeddicker as involving the line 
of stars immediately below the belt, shows this to 
have been the case in this instance. From the 
whole of the evidence it will, however, probably be 
conceded that the configuration of the stars of the 
belt, and the symmetrical arrangement of so many 
conspicuous stars in its neighbourhood in lines 
having the same general trend, demonstrates the 
reality of a close physical relation between the 
whole, while their peculiar relation to the course 
of the Milky Way renders probable an intimate 
relation between them and it. 

Mr. Proctor has directed special attention to the 
close association of lucid stars with the course of 
the Milky Way in the neighbourhood of the Coal 
Sack. Although by no means devoid of telescopic 
stars, the dark area of the Coal Sack does not in- 
clude one visible to the naked eye. If the naked- 
eye stars had been distributed over the heavens 
with uniformity, the number assigned to the Coal 
Sack should have been, at the least estimate, seven; 
and their avoidance of it is the more remarkable in 
that in the regions immediately surrounding it they 
are particularly richly represented. It becomes, 
therefore, scarcely possible not to regard the bright 



90 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

stars as intimately associated with the Milky Way 
in this region, and as being situated at nearly the 
same distance. The brilliant expansion of the 
Milky Way in which the Coal Sack is situated 
contains the five bright stars of the Southern Cross; 
and of these, the most brilliant the first-magnitude 
star a Crucis is actually upon its border. From 
the appearance of this star in a photograph taken 
by Mr. H. C. Russell at Sydney in iSgo, 1 Mr. 
Cowper Ranyard has maintained that there is 
strong evidence of its close association with groups 
of faint stars that appear upon the plate in its 
neighbourhood. The great star appears to be the 
centre of several diverging streams of small ones, 
while other groups of small stars are arranged con- 
centrically in circles round it. 

The apparent luminosity of a Crucis cannot 
exceed that of the smaller stars by less than three 
million times, so that if it be regarded as probable 
that all are equally remote, this proportion is also 
that of their actual luminosities. No data exist 
from which it is possible to form an estimate of the 
distance either of a Crucis or the faint stars, from 
which it would be possible to compare the actual 
light-giving powers of the stars with that of the 
Sun ; but if the great star be regarded as being not 
very different from the Sun in light-giving power, 
the small ones need scarcely be more than self- 
luminous planets; while, if the small ones are re- 
garded as the equivalents of the Sun, the large star 

1 The photograph is produced in Knowledge for June, 1891, and in The 
Old and New Astronomy. 



The Milky Way and Star Distribution. 91 

must be of such luminosity that, for its surface 
brilliancy to be no more than equal to that of the 
Sun, it must be capable of enclosing within itself 
the entire orbit of Saturn. Before accepting so 
astounding a view as the last, it is well to consider 
whether adequate grounds exist for regarding the 
former as improbable. 

From the accumulation of a considerable body of 
evidence, the general nature of which has been 
sketched in the preceding paragraphs, an intimate 
association appears probable between the naked-eye 
stars and the system of the Milky Way. The stars 
immediately below the naked-eye stars in brightness 
appear to be influenced by its course to a far less 
degree. It has been seen that the tendency to 
crowd towards the zone of the Milky Way practi- 
cally vanishes with stars just below the limit of 
vision; and any direct relation displayed by these 
faint stars towards the configuration of the streams 
of the Milky Way is difficult of detection. Stars of 
the ninth magnitude are, for instance, distributed 
with apparent uniformity over the space included 
between the divided streams between the Swan and 
the Centaur, scarcely if at all less richly than over 
the branches themselves; and faint telescopic stars 
are scattered with approximate evenness over the 
darkness of the Coal Sack. Thus, in their relation 
to the Milky Way the naked-eye stars appear to be 
differentiated from those immediately below them 
in brightness. Again, since the apparent brilliancy 
of a star is directly affected by its remoteness, it 
appears probable that the brightest among the stars 



92 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

are upon the whole those that are nearest. Since 
individual stars, as has been seen, vary enormously 
in magnitude, exceptions to such a generalization 
would of course be expected; they are, in fact, 
directly illustrated in the near proximity of so in- 
conspicuous an object as 61 Cygni, and in the un- 
fathomable remoteness of Arcturus ; but it would be 
anticipated that, with an increasing number of stars, 
such irregularities would gradually disappear in 
a general average. The intimate association of 
the brighter, and, therefore, in all probability the 
nearer, stars with the Milky Way, suggests the 
view that the Milky Way itself is a comparatively 
near neighbour in space. 

By another investigation, proceeding upon en- 
tirely independent lines, we are also led to regard 
it as probable that the brighter of the stars are 
differentiated from the rest in a special manner. 
From the time of Ptolemy it has been the custom 
to classify stars in ''magnitudes" in the order of 
their increasing faintness. To very bright stars, 
such as Aldebaran and Altair, a position in the first 
magnitude is assigned; visibility to the naked eye 
terminates under favourable conditions at about the 
sixth magnitude; the penetrating power of the 
largest telescopes probably reaches stars of the 
fifteenth magnitude, while the power of the photo- 
graphic plate possibly extends to some four or five 
magnitudes beyond. Since, however, the measure- 
ment of the brightness of a star is a matter of con- 
siderable delicacy, and, in fact, has only become 
satisfactorily possible in recent years, magnitudes 



The Milky Way and Star Distribution. 93 

assigned to stars by different astronomers have been 
largely a matter of individual judgment, and it is 
not surprising that the scales that have been adopted 
are very conflicting. Since the middle of the pre- 
sent century, however, at the original suggestion of 
Pogson, it has become the custom to apply to the 
term magnitude a more definite meaning than it 
had previously received. It had been noticed by 
Sir John Herschel, that, according to all generally 
accepted scales, stars of the first exceeded those of 
the sixth magnitude in luminosity very nearly 100 
times, and Pogson suggested that a ratio in light- 
giving power of 100 to i should be regarded as the 
definition of a difference of five magnitudes, the four 
intermediate magnitudes being interposed in such 
a manner that stars of any one magnitude should 
bear a constant ratio in their luminosity to those of 
the magnitude following. To satisfy this condition, 
it follows that any star must exceed in brightness 
another of one magnitude fainter by 2*512 . . times, 
this "light-ratio" being the fifth root of ico. 1 In 
the result, the estimations of magnitude by the 
older astronomers are found to conform very closely 
to the absolute scale so far as the naked-eye stars 
are concerned, but to deviate considerably from it 
for fainter ones. 

From the absolute definition of star magnitude it 
is possible to calculate the relative numbers in which 

1 Thus a first-magnitude star is equivalent to 2-512 second-magnitude 
stars, a second-magnitude star to 2-512 third-magnitude stars, and so on. 
Hence a first-magnitude star is equivalent to 2-512 x 2*512 or (2'5i2) 2 third- 
magnitude stars, (2'5i2) 3 fourth-magnitude stars, and (2'5i2) 8 or 100 sixth- 
magnitude stars. 



94 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

stars of different magnitudes should appear in the 
heavens upon the assumption of their uniform 
distribution in space. From the result of the 
calculation, the details of which may be left as an 
exercise in geometry to the reader and do not 
present any serious difficulty, it appears that if a 
number of stars, either of the same or different 
degrees of intrinsic brilliancy, were scattered in 
space, subject only to the condition that those of 
each degreeof luminosity were distributed uniformly, 
there should appear nearly four more accurately 
3-981 times as many stars of any given magni- 
tude as of the next exceeding it in brightness. For 
every star of the first magnitude there should 
appear, for instance, nearly four stars of the second, 
sixteen of the third, and sixty-four of the fourth. 
It cannot fail to be interesting to compare these 
numbers with those actually observed. 

Data for such a comparison are supplied in star 
catalogues. Of these the most extensive that has so 
far been constructed is known as the Bonn Durch- 
musterung. It was compiled under the supervision 
of Argelander between 1859 and 1862, and in it are 
recorded the positions and magnitudes of 324,198 
stars, all those of the northern hemisphere down 
to the 9-5 magnitude. The more recent catalogue 
constructed at Harvard by Professor E. C. Pickering, 
giving the magnitudes of stars as measured by the 
meridian photometer, is undoubtedly the more 
accurate in this respect, but, since it includes only 
those brighter than the 6-5 magnitude, it is not so 
well adapted to the present purpose. The same 



The Milky Way and Star Distribution. 95 

general result, however, appears from the adoption 
of the data of either the Bonn or the Harvard cata- 
logues, as well as from Dr. Gould's catalogue of 
stars visible from the southern hemisphere. 

The result of the comparison is expressed in the 
following table. In the second column are given 
the numbers of stars between the limits of magni- 
tude indicated in the first. These numbers are given 
by Littrow as the result of his examination of the 
Bonn Durchmusterung. The third column contains 
the numbers of stars that should have appeared 
upon the hypothesis of uniform distribution ; and the 
last, numbers obtained by dividing the figures in 
the second column by those in the third, that is, the 
numerical proportion of stars actually observed to 
those that should have been observed upon the 
uniform -distribution hypothesis, a quantity that 
may be conveniently described as the "apparent 
crowding ". 

COMPARISON BETWEEN THE OBSERVED NUMBERS OF STARS OF 
DIFFERENT MAGNITUDES WITH THE THEORETICAL NUMBERS 
UPON THE HYPOTHESIS OF UNIFORM DISTRIBUTION IN SPACE. 



Limiting 

magnitudes. 


Numbers of 
stars actually 
observed. 


Theoretical 
numbers. 


Apparent 
crowding. 


I to 2 


IO 


4 


2 '5 


2 to 3 


37 


15 


2-46 


3 to 4 


130 


58 


2-24 


4 to 5 


312 


234 


i "33 


5 to 6 


1,001 




i -08 


6 to 7 




3,705 


1-18 


7 to 8 


13,822 




"94 




19,698 


19,698 





96 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

The general result of the comparison, as ex- 
pressed in the figures of the last column, is very 
remarkable. There appear to be many more stars 
of the first five magnitudes than there should be 
according to the hypothesis of their uniform distri- 
bution in space. Rejecting the stars tabulated 
between the limits of the first and second magni- 
tudes as being too few from which to draw any 
reliable deduction, and also as comprising several 
stars, such as Arcturus and Vega, which should in 
strictness be excluded, as being too bright to be 
regarded even as first-magnitude stars, there is 
apparent in the record a crowding of the brighter 
stars, that diminishes with increasing faintness and 
becomes insignificant beyond the limit of the fifth 
magnitude that is, near the limit of visibility to 
the unaided eye. It has been stated that a similar 
appearance of crowding is recognizable in the more 
exact record of star magnitudes contained in the 
Harvard catalogue, as well as in Dr. Gould's 
catalogue of stars of the southern hemisphere. 

An apparent crowding of the brighter stars 
would be quite consistent with their uniform dis- 
tribution if light experienced absorption in space, 
since such absorption would affect the light from 
distant stars to a greater extent than that from 
nearer ones. This explanation, however, scarcely 
appears to be applicable here, since from the fifth 
magnitude to the eighth, stars appear in numbers 
not very different from those estimated upon the 
assumption of their uniform distribution. Were 
there appreciable light absorption within the limits 



The Milky Way and Star Distribution. 97 

of space in which stars as far as those of the eighth 
magnitude are distributed, its effects should be as 
conspicuous in the falling off of numbers in succes- 
sive magnitudes among the fainter as in brighter 
magnitudes. 

The most simple view to take with reference to 
the apparent crowding of the brighter stars is that 
it results from a real crowding of stars in the neigh- 
bourhood of the Sun. There is nothing inherently 
improbable in this view, since the study of the sky 
reveals numerous analogous instances of the cluster- 
ing of stars. Setting aside such extreme cases as 
are presented in the Pleiades, the Hyades, and 
other such strongly pronounced clusters, many rich 
regions of the heavens, not even included in the 
Milky Way, furnish instances in which the local 
density of star distribution is far in excess of that 
which could have resulted from chance distribution. 

The suggestion of a clustering of stars in the 
neighbourhood of the Sun acquires additional 
interest from the indications already recognized, 
that the nearer among the stars are differentiated 
from the rest by an intimate association displayed 
by them towards the stream of the Milky Way. It 
appears scarcely possible not to recognize in the 
complete testimony a suggestion that the Sun is a 
member of a star-cluster, one in which the Milky 
Way is involved as a stream of stars far smaller than 
the more conspicuous members of the cluster, but 
closely associated with the fundamental scheme of 
its structure. According to such view the appear- 
ance of uniformity in the distribution of the stars 

(M520) G 



98 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

from the fifth to the eighth magnitude, as well as 
their comparative indifference to the zone of the 
Milky Way, are alike due to their lying for the 
most part beyond the region in which the clustering 
tendency and the apparently attractive influence of 
the Milky Way extends. The Milky Way, to- 
gether with the cluster containing the Sun, may 
conceivably constitute a true independent system, 
while it is possible that similarly associated with 
other star-clusters there may exist other streams of 
star-dust, undistinguishable from their excessive , 
remoteness. 

Before regarding this speculation as probable, it 
is essential to imagine some possible explanation 
of the crowding towards the Milky Way again 
exhibited by the still fainter telescopic stars. It is 
not inconceivable that this appearance may be due 
to the escape of true Milky-Way stars from within 
its stream into external space. It is not possible 
here to develop this suggestion fully, but it would 
appear probable, that, if a number of stars were 
distributed at random and with random velocities 
both as regards magnitude and direction through 
a definite region in space, a condition of things 
would result not unlike that imagined in the kinetic 
theory of gases. Pairs of members of the swarm 
would from time to time approach so closely as to 
describe, under the influence of their mutual gravi- 
tation, hyperbolic orbits round each other, the 
common centre of mass of the pair marking the 
position of a common focus. If, by chance, it 
happened that the masses and velocities of the pair 



The Milky Way and Star Distribution. 99 

were so related that their centre of mass was at rest, 
the direction only of the star motions would be 
affected by their near approach, the velocity of each 
being reduced upon separation to an extent equal 
to its increase upon approach ; but if, as would 
generally be the case, the centre of mass was in 
motion, since the velocities of the stars would be 
ultimately unaffected with reference to it, the actual 
velocities would be changed, the star receding 
after the " encounter" in the direction of motion of 
the centre of mass having its velocity increased, 
while the speed of the other would have become 
less. Encounters between stars continually occur- 
ring, all velocities, without limit of magnitude, 
would be continually being produced in the cluster, 
and from time to time a star would acquire sufficient 
speed to carry it beyond the limits of the cluster, 
while its speed might be so great as to place it 
beyond the controlling influence of gravitation, in 
which case it would leave the cluster never to 
return. The system would slowly disintegrate, and 
during the process the escaped members would be 
found scattered in external space most densely 
distributed in the immediate neighbourhood of the 
original swarm. 

Similar encounters must occasionally take place 
between members of the main cluster in which the 
Milky Way is involved, which, by similar reasoning, 
it is scarcely possible to regard as a stable system. 
The extreme velocity of such "runaway" stars as 
1830 Groombridge may well be due to their having 
experienced a number of favourable encounters with 



ioo Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

other stars, and in any case does not point to their 
being, as has been suggested, temporary visitors to 
the system of the visible stars from external regions 
of space, ploughing their way through it by reason 
of enormous initial speeds incapable of generation 
by the gravitational attraction of the system. It is 
conceivable that in the remote past the sun-cluster 
may have been far richer than it is now, and the 
firmament may have been more resplendent with 
brilliant stars, but that from age to age its members 
may have been gradually scattered, and the vault of 
heaven may now be growing poorer. 

It is scarcely necessary to remind the reader that 
in this chapter no attempt has been made to explain 
the function of the Milky Way, or its connection 
with the stars. An attempt only has been made in 
the latter pages to define its possible relation to the 
stars, and it is not suggested that the attempt ex- 
tends beyond the limits of speculation. Ignorance 
of the distances of more than an insignificant 
minority of its members appears at present an in- 
superable obstacle towards extending the web of 
exact knowledge far into the system of the stars; 
but, in the absence of more exact methods, it is 
impossible for the lover of the picture of infinite 
grandeur and majesty, mapped out night by night 
upon the fair face of the starlit sky, to refrain from 
indulging in some conjecture, however vague and 
in itself unsatisfactory, as to the meaning of so ex- 
quisitely beautiful and mysterious a record. 



The Recent Study of Mars. 



Chapter III. 
The Recent Study of Mars. ''. ' "-H 

From the time that the telescope revealed to Sir 
William Herschel the first clear picture of the planet 
Mars, and led him to regard the details of the 
delicately-tinted image presented to his view as 
indicating the existence upon the surface of the 
planet of physical conditions not very unlike those 
familiar to the inhabitants of the Earth, a special 
interest has attached to this, the only one of the 
orbs of heaven that it is possible to contemplate 
with any degree of confidence as a sister world. In 
their distribution, general configuration, and colour, 
the planetary markings have appeared during the 
greater part of the present century to harmonize 
well with their tempting interpretation as oceans, 
continents, and polar regions bound in eternal 
snow. The rotation of the planet and the haze in 
which many of its features appeared to be en- 
veloped indicate the regular succession of day and 
night, each passing into the other by the insensible 
gradations of morning and evening twilight; while 
the tilt of the axis of rotation of the planet to the 
plane of its orbit demonstrates the constant recur- 
rence of seasons. In recognizing upon a planet 
so many conditions essential to its well-being as a 
world, it has been impossible to restrain imagina- 
tion from supplementing actual discovery in regions 
lying beyond the power of telescopic observation. 



102 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

The lands and waters of Mars teemed with animal 
and VegetabieVlife. In lands over which the cold 
and, heat qf.winjter an4 summer and day and night 
never ceased;, - seed-time and harvest were added; 
while, passing their brief span of struggle and 
passion, and fighting to maintain their mastery over 
nature, were intelligent beings, towards whom, in 
imagination, the right hand of fellowship was 
longingly extended across a separating chasm of 
nearly 50,000,000 miles. 

For the greater part of the century that followed 
Herschel's observations, although knowledge of 
Martian detail steadily increased, little was added 
to it materially to affect the nature of the picture 
drawn by him. In the drawings of Beer and 
Madler, Dawes, and other astronomers, as in the 
exquisite pictures constructed by Green from his 
study of the planet from Madeira during its 
specially favourable appearance in 1877, the planet, 
though shown in greater detail and perfection, was 
essentially the Mars of Sir William Herschel, and his 
view of Mars as "a miniature of the Earth" appeared 
to derive additional confirmation. More recently, 
however, interest in Mars has been reawakened 
and maintained at the highest pitch by the alleged 
appearance upon the surface of the planet of a 
variety of detail of the most unexpected and per- 
plexing kind. The " canal system" of Mars, the 
first suspicion of which was suggested to Schiapar- 
elli in 1877, if it has led to speculations that scarcely 
add to the dignity of science, has renewed the youth 
of Martian study, and has directed towards the 



The Recent Study of Mars. 103 

planet a keen scrutiny only rendered possible by 
the construction of the great telescopes of modern 
times. In the present chapter an attempt will be 
made to trace the course of recent discovery upon 
Mars, and to discuss, though necessarily imper- 
fectly, certain views that have been suggested, and 
some difficulties that have arisen, in the attempted 
interpretation of the appearances. 

The planet Mars lies next the Earth in order of 
increasing distance from the Sun, the distance 
of Mars being 141,500,000 miles, while that of the 
Earth is rather less than 93,000,000. The respec- 
tive distances are therefore in the proportion of 
1-523 to i, or nearly of 3 to 2, a relation that 
will be useful in the sequel. The diameter of 
Mars is 4230 miles, that of the Earth being 7918 
miles, from which it follows, from simple geometry, 
that in volume the Earth exceeds Mars by 6-57 
times. From disturbances produced by Mars in 
the movements of other members of the Solar 
System, by its gravitational attraction upon them, 
it appears that its mass or quantity of contained 
matter is less than that of the Earth in the pro- 
portion of i to 9-34. Consequently, the Earth 
being 9*34 times as massive while only 6*57 times 
as bulky as Mars, the density or mass of a given 
bulk of the Earth must exceed that of Mars in 
the proportion of 9^34 to 6*57, or of 1-42 to i. It 
also follows from these data that the intensity of 
gravitation exercised by Mars upon bodies at its 
surface must be less than that exercised by the 
Earth upon bodies at its surface in the proportion 



io4 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

very nearly of 2 to 5, that is, a body the weight of 
which had been determined at the surface of the 
Earth, would, if it were transferred to the surface of 
Mars, weigh only two-fifths as much. Like the 
Earth, Mars travels round the Sun in an orbit that 
is, although nearly circular, slightly elliptical, the 
planes of the two orbits very nearly coinciding. 
The period occupied by the planet in completing 
its orbit that is, the year of the planet is 686-9 
days, the Earth's year being 365-26 days. The 
longer period of Mars is due, partly to the greater 
length of its orbit, and partly to the planet's speed 
in its orbit being less than that of the Earth in its 
orbit, a consequence of its greater distance from the 
Sun. 

Like all planets the orbits of which inclose that 
of the Earth, Mars is seen to best advantage when 
in " opposition " to the Sun that is, at the instant 
at which the Earth, overtaking the planet in its 
slower journey, passes directly between it and the 
Sun. Under these conditions, not only is the dis- 
tance separating the Earth from Mars less, and the 
apparent size of the planet therefore greater, than 
at other times; but the hemisphere of the planet 
that is illuminated by the Sun is presented directly 
towards the Earth, so that the disc appears " full ". 
At other times, when the illuminated hemisphere 
is not directly presented to the Earth, the planet 
exhibits phases resembling those of the Moon when 
not far from the full. The phases of Mars show 
that, like the Earth and Moon, it is not inherently 
luminous, but that it is rendered visible by sunlight 



The Recent Study of Mars. 105 

scattered from its surface. It is clear that, as is 
the case with the Moon when full, a planet in 
opposition to the Sun must rise in the east as the 
Sun sets in the west, and, after ascending the 
heavens during the evening hours and attaining 
its greatest altitude in the south at midnight, must 
descend towards the west in the early morning, 
setting at sunrise. Hence, a further advantage of 
a planet's being in opposition arises from its being 
then visible through all the hours of the night. 

If the orbits of the Earth and Mars were circles 
lying in the same plane and having the same centre, 
and if the Sun occupied the common centre, then, 
at every opposition, no matter what position in its 
orbit the Earth might happen to occupy, its distance 
from Mars would be the same. Under such circum- 
stances Mars would appear under the same con- 
ditions at every opposition, and all would therefore 
be equally favourable. These simple conditions do 
not, however, exist. The planes of the orbits are 
indeed so nearly coincident that their deviation from 
perfect coincidence may for the present purpose be 
ignored; but the forms of both orbits are ellipses, 
deviating, especially in the case of the orbit of Mars, 
appreciably from the circular form ; while, in accord- 
ance with Kepler's first law of planetary motion, the 
Sun is situated, not in the centre, but in a focus 
common to each ellipse. The orbits of the Earth 
and Mars, and the Sun's position relatively to them, 
are represented to scale in the accompanying figure 
(fig. 6), and it is interesting to notice that the ellip- 
ticity of each orbit is indicated far more clearly in 



io6 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

the displacement of the Sun from the centre than by 
deviation from circularity in outline, which indeed, 
even in the case of the more elliptical orbit of Mars, 
is probably inappreciable to the most critical eye. 



Ql899Jan.18. 



O 



901 Feb. 22. 



1894 Oct. 20, 




O 



W88 April 11. 



( Jl890May27. 
Fig. 6. Oppositions of Mars. 



7892 August 3. 



From the eccentricities of the orbits of the Earth 
and Mars, and from the position of the Sun rela- 
tively to them, it follows that, in one direction 
indicated by the line sx in the figure the distance 
between the orbits, as measured along a straight 
line radiating from the Sun, is least. If, therefore, 
at the time that the Earth is crossing this line, Mars 
also happens to lie upon it, an opposition will result 



The Recent Study of Mars. 107 

which will be the most favourable possible; the 
planet then appearing brighter to the naked eye, 
and presenting a larger disc when viewed through 
the telescope, than at any other time; while other 
oppositions will be more or less favourable accord- 
ing as to whether the direction of the Earth and 
Mars as viewed from the Sun is nearer or farther 
from the line of most favourable opposition sx. 
The Earth in its annual journey round the Sun 
crosses the line sx upon the 26th of August in each 
year; hence, the nearer to this date of occurrence, 
the more favourable is an opposition of Mars. 

Since the periods of revolution of the Earth and 
Mars round the Sun are 365*26 and 686*9 days 
respectively, it follows, from simple arithmetic, 
that, upon the average, the Earth must overtake 
Mars, and an opposition must therefore occur, at 
intervals of 780 days, or nearly two years and two 
months. This would be the constant interval be- 
tween any two successive oppositions if the orbits 
were circles with the Sun in their common centre, 
and if, as would then necessarily be the case, the 
speed of each planet were uniform. Owing, how- 
ever, to the elliptical forms of the orbits, and to the 
fact, expressed in Kepler's second law of planetary 
motion, that the velocities of both the Earth and 
planet vary with their distance from the Sun, the 
intervals between successive oppositions are some- 
times greater and at other times less than the aver- 
age, the exact calculation for particular cases being 
a very laborious matter. In the figure the positions 
of the Earth and Mars are given for all oppositions 



io8 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

occurring between 1886 and 1901. It will be seen 
that oppositions are now (1898) becoming less and 
less favourable, and that they will continue to 
deteriorate until 1901, in which year an opposition 
will occur under almost the most unfavourable con- 
ditions possible. After 1901, however, improve- 
ment will set in, culminating in fine oppositions in 
1907 and 1909. The circular discs arranged outside 
the orbit of Mars in the figure represent to scale the 
relative apparent sizes of the disc of Mars as seen 
from the Earth at the different oppositions. They 
show in a striking manner the special advantages 
attending oppositions that occur in the early autumn 
months. 

Viewed through a fine telescope and under favour- 
able conditions, Mars, when in opposition, presents 
a picture of singular beauty and charm. Markings, 
some so distinct as to be clearly recognized at a 
first glance, others less strongly pronounced, and 
others again so faint as to tax the powers of the 
keenest vision assisted by the finest optical power, 
are distributed over the disc-like picture ; while the 
beauty of the spectacle is enhanced by the presence 
and variety of colour, and by exquisite gradations 
of tint in different regions. 

Upon continuing the study of the planet, it soon 
becomes evident that change is in progress, not in 
the form of the features themselves, but in their 
positions relatively to the outline of the planet. 
Details first seen near the centre of the disc have 
drifted to the left; others, originally near the left 
limb, have disappeared ; while others, previously 



The Recent Study of Mars. 109 

invisible, have appeared within the right-hand limb. 
These changes clearly indicate, that, like the Earth, 
Mars is in rotation. Further, it becomes apparent 
that the period of rotation of the planet does not 
differ very much from that of the Earth, for in little 
more than twenty-four hours the picture presented 
is again that originally seen. 1 Day and night, the 
appearance of diurnal revolution of the heavens, as 
well as all other celestial phenomena resulting from 
the rotation of a planet, follow therefore upon Mars 
with the same regularity, and at nearly the same 
rate, as upon the Earth. 

From the study of the planet's rotation it is a 
simple matter to determine the position within it of 
the axis about which the rotation takes place. 
When this is done, it is found, that, as is the case 
with the Earth, the axis of rotation of the planet 
is inclined to the plane of its orbit round the Sun, 
the inclination of the axis (24 50') curiously approxi- 
mating in value to that of the inclination of the 
Earth's axis to the plane of its orbit (23 27'). The 
tilt of the axis of rotation gives rise to the phenomena 
of seasons; hence upon Mars, spring, summer, 
autumn, and winter follow with the unceasing 
regularity familiar to inhabitants of the Earth. 

A further point of similarity between the physical 
conditions existing upon Mars and those upon the 
Earth becomes apparent from the study of the 
planet's rotation. As different features are carried 
by the rotation towards the left-hand limb, they 
disappear while still at an appreciable distance from 

1 The period of rotation of Mars is 24 hours 37 minutes 23 seconds. 



no Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

it, melting into a luminous ring known as the 
"limb-light", that appears to continually cling to 
the outline of the planet, extending inwards for 
some distance from the limb. In a similar manner, 
features brought into view by rotation do not at 
once appear as they are brought on to the disc, but 
as gradually emerge from the limb-light upon their 
side of the planet, only becoming distinctly visible 
when the rotation has carried them a considerable 
distance on to the disc. 

The suggestion that Mars is enveloped in an 
atmosphere similar in its physical properties to 
that of the Earth offers so simple and sufficient an 
explanation of the limb-light that it is scarcely 
possible not to regard it as the true one, more 
especially as the existence of an atmosphere upon 
Mars is independently demonstrated from the 
nature of changes continually in progress in the 
visible features of the planet, to which attention will 
shortly be directed. According to this view, the 
appearance of the limb-light results from the 
scattering of the Sun's rays in the atmosphere of 
Mars. Simple considerations, such as, for instance, 
the darkened tint of the sky when viewed from 
high altitudes, indicate that the appearance of 
the sky as a vault of deep-blue eternally extended 
overhead is due to a scattering of the Sun's rays 
in the atmosphere of the Earth. Tyndall has 
shown by a series of experiments of extreme 
beauty that this scattering is in all probability 
effected by innumerable minute vesicles of water 
floating in the atmosphere, and that the forma- 



The Recent Study of Mars. in 

tion of these vesicles is assisted by, or may 
indeed be entirely dependent upon, the presence 
of specks of dust, which form nuclei around which 
condensation of the vapour of water present in 
the atmosphere takes place. It is in harmony 
alike with theory and experiment that the more 
refrangible of the Sun's rays should experience 
such scattering to a far greater degree than those 
less refrangible ; so that, of the component colours 
of a ray of sunlight penetrating a column of atmos- 
phere, the more refrangible colours those near 
the violet end of the spectrum should be scattered 
in all directions around, while the less refrangible 
the red and adjacent rays of the spectrum should 
pass through more readily, a law illustrated in the 
familiar fact of the great penetrative power of a red 
light in a fog, and also supplying an explanation of 
the transparent blue of the noonday sky and the 
crimson colours of sunset. Assuming the existence 
upon Mars of an atmosphere possessing similar 
dispersive powers, the limb-light is simply and 
naturally explained. Bathed in the Sun's rays 
and containing floating matter capable of scatter- 
ing them, the atmosphere of Mars would form a 
luminous shell enshrouding the visible hemisphere 
of the planet. The line of vision from the Earth 
directed to the centre of the disc pierces this shell 
perpendicularly ; the portion of its length included 
in the shell is therefore the least possible, and the 
illumination of the atmosphere is barely appreciable. 
The line of sight to the limb, however, meets the 
visible hemisphere tangentially, and, traversing the 



ii2 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

air-shell very obliquely, its intercepted length is 
great, and the illumination of the air very apparent. 
From the edge towards the centre of the disc the 
length of the line of vision involved in the atmos- 
phere of the planet continually decreases, the 
appearance of illumination therefore becomes less 
and less, and the limb-light is the result. 

The fading of the planetary features upon ap- 
proaching the limb is further aided, first, by the 
fact that as they approach the edge of the visible 
hemisphere their actual illumination becomes less, 
as does the terrestrial landscape towards sunset, 
both from the increasing slant of the Sun's rays and 
by the greater absorption exercised upon the rays 
from the greater length of their atmospheric path; 1 
and, secondly, from the greater length of the 
Martian atmosphere through which they are viewed, 
and the consequent increased absorption exercised 
upon the rays in retraversing the atmosphere, after 
reflection from the surface of the planet. 

Explanations other than the one advanced here 
have been suggested to explain the limb-light. 
The appearance has been ascribed to the deposition 
of hoar-frost, upon the approach of night, over 
regions about to enter the dark hemisphere of the 
planet; and to the lingering of the frost in the early 
morning over those that have recently emerged 
from it. This suggestion appears, however, to be 
disproved by the observed symmetry of the limb- 
light in the cold polar and warmer equatorial 
regions of the planet; and by the fact that, in 

x This only applies to Mars when in or near opposition. 



The Recent Study of Mars. 113 

observations made at times when Mars is not in 
opposition, and when, consequently, its disc does 
not appear to be full, the limb-light has been seen 
to cling to the limb itself in preference to those 
regions in which morning and evening are in- 
dicated by proximity to the terminating line sepa- 
rating the dark from the bright hemisphere. 

The tenuity of the veil spread over the illuminated 
hemisphere by the atmosphere is generally taken to 
indicate that the surface density of the atmosphere 
that is, the quantity of air accumulated over each 
square mile of surface is less in the case of Mars 
than in that of the Earth. It is probable, that if 
the surface density of the Martian atmosphere were 
equal to that of the Earth, its veiling effects would 
be far more pronounced than they are; and that, 
even in the centre of the disc, the surface markings 
would be permanently concealed beneath a brilliant 
haze. Recognizing that the appearance of the sky 
is the result of the scattering of sunlight in the 
Earth's atmosphere, it will be apparent that, to 
an observer who should ascend above the highest 
reaches of the air, the Earth would appear upon a 
clear day to be veiled by the blue haze of the sky, 
now lying between him and the landscape beneath. 
From actual measurements of the brightness of 
the sky carried out by Langley it has been con- 
cluded that to such an observer all terrestrial 
features except the most brilliant would be scarcely 
visible, their fainter light being overwhelmed by the 
more intense glare of the intervening atmosphere. 
To a possible inhabitant of another planet, provided 

(M520) H 



ii4 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

with adequate instrumental means, the Earth would 
appear as a dazzlingly brilliant, but probably a 
nearly uniformly illuminated orb. The ice-bound 
regions near the poles and the snow-clad summit of 
a mountain, might, here and there, be clearly dis- 
tinguishable in the general luminosity of its disc, 
but it would scarcely be possible to trace upon it 
any of the more familiar terrestrial features. Upon 
Mars, however, surface markings are clearly re- 
cognized unless fairly close to the limb, while those 
in the centre of the disc appear to experience but 
slightly the effects of atmospheric veiling. It is 
therefore commonly assumed that in the density of 
surface distribution of atmosphere, Mars is poorer 
than the planet Earth. 

It must be acknowledged that this reasoning, 
though lending a strong probability to the view, is 
not quite conclusive. It essentially rests upon the 
assumption that the power of an atmosphere to 
scatter light may be taken as a measure of its 
density. It has been seen, however, that the 
scattering of light is effected by solid and liquid 
matter suspended in the air, and is not, therefore, 
an inherent property of an atmosphere itself. Were 
there no floating matter in the Earth's atmosphere, 
there would be no scattering of light within it. The 
blue sky, even in the immediate neighbourhood of 
the noonday sun, would under such conditions be 
replaced by a vault of intense black, in which, by 
day as by night, the stars would shine with a lustre 
unknown even on the clearest and darkest nights. 
Absorption of light would still occur, but to so 



The Recent Study of Mars 115 

slight an extent such is the transparency of pure 
air as to be barely appreciable ; while it is hardly 
necessary to state that the absorbed light would be 
entirely extinguished, and that no appearance of a 
sky could result from it. That the atmosphere of 
Mars contains floating matter in proportion to its 
density may be true, but it is an assumption that it 
is not possible to verify. It will be seen later that 
there are indications of a scarcity of water on the 
surface of Mars, and that there is a very strong 
probability that its atmosphere is charged with the 
vapour of water to a far less extent than is the 
atmosphere of the Earth. It is probable that the 
condensation of the vapour of water plays an im- 
portant part in the dispersive action of the atmos- 
phere on light, and that, therefore, under conditions 
otherwise similar, a less moist atmosphere would 
possess a feebler scattering power than another. 
That Mars possesses a more tenuous atmosphere 
than that of the Earth may be probable, but an 
equal or even a greater density is not inconsistent 
with the telescopic aspect of the planet. 1 

Spectroscopic evidence bearing upon the question 
of the Martian atmosphere is so curiously conflicting 
that it is perhaps better to wait for further observa- 
tions before taking it seriously into account. 

Of the different features apparent upon the disc of 
Mars, generally the most conspicuous are two white 
patches, nearly always visible in the neighbourhood 

1 The a priori arguments, based upon the relative volumes and masses of 
Mars and the Earth, that are frequently adduced as evidence for a rare 
atmosphere on the planet appear to possess little if any value. 



n6 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

of the poles, though not arranged symmetrically 
round them. So brilliant are they, that they have 
been seen sparkling like twin stars at times when 
the sky has been covered by haze to such an extent 
that the outlines of the planet itself have been in- 
visible. From their general appearance, as well as 
from their situation in the immediate neighbourhood 
of the poles, they have been regarded as accumula- 
tions of snow and ice, similar in their nature and in 
their mode of formation to the polar caps of the 
Earth. This conclusion is strongly supported by 
the nature of the changes apparent in both of them 
during the progress of the Martian seasons. Upon 
the approach and during the continuance of winter 
in either hemisphere of Mars, as, in the orbital 
movement of the planet, the hemisphere is turned 
from the Sun, the white cap surrounding its pole 
continually increases, its boundaries extending 
farther and farther towards the equator; while later, 
during spring and summer, as the hemisphere is 
again turned towards the Sun, its white covering 
dwindles in dimension, becoming generally reduced 
to an insignificant oval patch. Upon a recent occa- 
sion, indeed, when the planet was near its opposition 
in 1894, tne south polar cap entirely vanished, the 
substance composing it having been apparently 
dissipated beneath the rays of the summer sun. 
Other appearances, more rarely recognized in the 
caps and in their immediate neighbourhood, lend 
additional support to this view. On June 8th, 1894, 
Mr. Lowell, while observing Mars from Arizona, 
saw two points of light of dazzling brilliancy flash 



The Recent Study of Mars. 117 

out in the midst of the south polar cap. For a few 
moments they sparkled in the surrounding white- 
ness and then disappeared. It is difficult to resist 
Mr. Lowell's interpretation that their appearance was 
due to the glint of ice-slopes flashing the sunlight 
towards the Earth, as, during the rotation of the 
planet, the slopes were for a few moments placed at 
the proper angle to the rays. Similar appearances 
had been noticed by Mr. Green during the opposi- 
tion of 1877, but in this case they were seen near to, 
but not actually involved in, the polar cap. 

Distributed round the planet in a rough zone ap- 
preciably parallel to its equator, and extending over 
considerably more than a half of its entire surface, 
are a number of patches, generally of a soft rounded 
outline, and of a colour that has suggested the 
orange-yellow of a field of ripe corn. It is to these 
that the planet owes the familiar ruddy tint that has 
caused it to be associated in name with the god of 
war. Bounding, and frequently deeply indenting, 
these orange masses are regions of a gray-green 
tint, and these complete the picture of the planet's 
surface as seen with moderate optical power. En- 
couraged by the close similarity in appearance and 
behaviour between the polar caps of Mars and the 
Earth, it has been the custom to pursue the analogy 
further, and to see in the orange patches and in the 
gray-green markings upon Mars the continents and 
oceans of a miniature world. 

That the orange masses upon Mars are indeed 
land appears probable, from the similarity in their 
appearance to that which it may be well supposed 



n8 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

the great deserts of the Earth would present under 
similar conditions of observation, as well as from 
the permanent appearance upon them of delicate 
markings revealed by higher optical power; though, 
perhaps, as strong an argument as any lies in the 
difficulty of suggesting any other explanation for 
their appearance. That the gray-green markings 
are the surfaces of Martian seas appears at a first 
glance a scarcely less plausible suggestion. Their 
colour is not unlike that of water; the existence of 
extensive tracts of water upon Mars harmonizes well 
with the view of the polar caps as accumulations of 
snow and ice ; and their aqueous character was sup- 
posed to have received its final confirmation in 1867, 
from the announcement of Sir William Huggins, 
that, from the spectroscopic examination of the light 
from Mars, he had detected the existence of the 
vapour of water as a constituent of its atmosphere. 
Of late years, however, considerable doubt has been 
thrown upon this rather attractive view. In 1877 
Schiaparelli of Milan maintained that, if the gray- 
green markings were the surfaces of water, they 
should occasionally, when turned at the proper 
angle to the directions of the Sun and Earth, unless 
indeed their surfaces were continually in a state of 
violent disturbance, reflect the Sun's rays in such a 
manner that its image should appear as a bright 
star sparkling upon them. It is not difficult, upon 
the assumption that the water surface is clean and 
still, to calculate the intensity of the solar image 
that should be formed under the actual conditions, 
and it appears that it should be so brilliant as to be 



The Recent Study of Mars. 119 

readily capable of recognition. No such appear- 
ance has, however, ever been recorded upon the 
disc of Mars. 

A very interesting though not in itself a con- 
clusive observation has recently been made by Pro- 
fessor W. H. Pickering, in the examination of Mars 
under the polariscope. It is well known that the 
fraction of light that is regularly reflected from the 
surface of any transparent substance exhibits the 
phenomena of polarization it is capable of being 
again reflected more or less effectively by a second 
transparent surface, according to its direction of 
incidence upon it; it is transmitted through certain 
crystals such as tourmaline more or less readily, 
according to the direction of the axis of the crystal; 
and upon traversing many crystals, and in its 
subsequent analysis by a second polarizing appa- 
ratus, it is capable of developing the exquisite effects 
of colour familiar to many observers with the micro- 
scope. It is a simple matter to detect polarization 
in light reflected from a plane glass or a water sur- 
face, especially for certain angles of incidence, and 
in the light of the sky, which is strongly polarized 
as the result of its scattering by water vesicles 
suspended in the atmosphere. In 1894 Pickering 
examined the light from the gray-green markings 
upon Mars with a specially-constructed polariscope, 
but failed to detect in any of them any trace of 
polarization. 

There is no doubt that if polarization had been 
evident in the light of the gray-green markings, 
their liquid nature would have been demonstrated; 



120 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

but the interpretation of the negative evidence is not 
so definite. Polarization would be produced by 
regular reflection by which is meant reflection as 
from a mirror, the angle of incidence being equal to 
that of reflection or it might conceivably result 
from the scattering of light by fine particles sus- 
pended in a body of water, in a manner analogous 
to that by which the appearance of the sky is pro- 
duced. If, however, the surface of water were not 
clean, the impurities upon it would scatter light 
incident upon it in all directions, and in light so 
scattered no polarization should be apparent; there 
would, in fact, be no water surface exposed to the 
light, but a dirt surface concealing a water surface 
beneath. Pickering's observations would appear to 
indicate that if the aqueous view of the gray-green 
markings is to be retained, it must be modified in 
this direction. The same modification would also 
account for the non-appearance of the image of the 
Sun upon the surfaces of Martian seas. 

Still more recent and direct observations appear 
to involve a complete refutation of the aqueous 
character of the gray-green markings on Mars. 
Mr. Douglass at Arizona in 1894, an ^ M r - Barnard 
at the Lick Observatory in 1896, have succeeded in 
distinguishing over the entire surfaces of them a 
considerable amount of delicate and permanent 
detail, an intricate tracery clearly inconsistent with 
the older view as to their nature. Mr. Barnard, in 
particular, examining the planet with the superb 
refractor of the Lick Observatory upon Mount 
Hamilton, under atmospheric conditions that fre- 



The Recent Study of Mars. 121 

quently approximated to perfection, describes the 
detail revealed in the regions of the so-called seas 
as being so intricate, small, and abundant, that it 
baffled all attempts to properly delineate it. He 
suggests that, to those who have looked down upon 
a mountainous country from a considerable eleva- 
tion, some conception of the appearance presented 
may be formed. From the appearance of the 
country round Mount Hamilton as seen from the 
observatory, it was possible to imagine that, as 
viewed from a great altitude, this region, broken by 
canon, slope, and ridge, would closely resemble 
the surface of the Martian seas. During the obser- 
vations the conviction seemed to force itself upon 
the observer that he was actually looking down 
from a great elevation upon just such a surface 
as that above which the observatory was situated. 

It appears, therefore, that if water exists at all 
upon Mars in the liquid form, it must be sought 
elsewhere than in the so-called seas; and it is 
possible that, in an observation made in 1894 by 
Mr. Lowell and Professor Pickering, its place upon 
the surface of the planet was revealed for the first 
time. During a careful study of Mars, when near 
its opposition in that year, with the aid of a fine 
refracting telescope of 18 inches of aperture, there 
appeared a dark belt forming a fringe to the south 
polar cap. The belt first appeared after rather 
more than a Martian month following the spring 
equinox of the planet. It was estimated as being 
the darkest marking on the disc, and appeared to 
be of a decidedly blue colour. As the polar cap 



122 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

dwindled, the belt followed, clinging to its edge. 
At midsummer upon Mars it was described as a 
barely discernible thread drawn round the minute 
white patch, which was all that then remained of 
the enormous snow-fields of some months before. 
Finally, when the cap vanished, the spot, where 
its girdle, long since too small for detection, had 
existed, had become one yellow stretch. 1 

That the belt seen upon this occasion was water, 
or at any rate liquid formed by the melting of the 
polar cap, appears a plausible suggestion, and 
appears more probable from the fact that Professor 
Pickering, on subjecting it to examination with 
the polariscope, was convinced that its light showed 
marked evidence of polarization. The interpreta- 
tion of the sequence of the observed phenomena 
appears to be that the melting of the polar cap 
gave rise to a fringing belt of liquid, which first 
appeared as such, but was rapidly distributed over 
the summer hemisphere in streams too fine for 
detection. 

A dark belt surrounding the north polar cap had 
been seen as early as 1830 by Beer and Madler, 
and other like appearances, which may have been 
of the same nature, have been recorded by other 
astronomers. 

The atmosphere of Mars appears to be in striking 
contrast with that of the Earth, in its almost entire 
freedom from cloud or mist. From time to time 
during the study of the planet, extensive regions 
have appeared, sometimes for a considerable time, 

1 Mars, by Percival Lowell 



The Recent Study of Mars. 123 

to be indistinct, the result, it has been generally 
supposed, of accumulated cloud or mist; but as 
more perfect optical means have been applied, and 
as observations have been conducted from localities 
specially selected for their atmospheric steadiness 
and the consequent improvement in the definition 
of the telescopic picture the appearances have 
become less and less frequent. During the entire 
course of a series of observations upon the planet, 
continually maintained at Flagstaff in Arizona, 
under the direction of Mr. Lowell, from May to 
the end of November, in the year 1894, no case 
of obscuration that could be ascribed to cloud or 
mist was recorded by anyone of the three astrono- 
mers engaged in the work, with the exception, 
perhaps, of some minute white specks, limited in 
position to the immediate neighbourhood of the 
line of division between the bright and dark hemi- 
spheres, and which may have been transient morning 
and evening clouds. During the actual progress 
of these observations, however, other astronomers, 
observing Mars with less perfect optical means and 
under less favoured atmospheric conditions, believed 
that they recognized one of the most extensive for- 
mations of cloud that has ever been recorded. To 
Mr. Stanley Williams at Brighton, for instance, the 
greater part of the Miraldi Sea, one of the largest, 
darkest, most definite, and most characteristic of the 
green regions, disappeared almost entirely from 
view, apparently densely obscured by cloud or mist. 1 
There is no doubt that changes in the tint of several 

i Observatory, 1894, p. 391. 



124 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

regions of the planet's surface are of frequent occur- 
rence, and it is possible that such changes, which 
may cause the disappearance of detail, especially 
if accompanied by a general lightening of tint, 
may have been interpreted as cloud and mist. In 
the apparent absence of cloud, and, consequently, 
of rain, upon the surface of the planet, it is probable 
that the polar caps are formed by the continued 
deposition, as hoar-frost, during the long Martian 
winter, of the vapour of water or of some other 
liquid present in the atmosphere. 

When the planet was near its very favourable 
opposition in 1877, Schiaparelli at Milan, while 
observing with a telescope of rather over 8 inches 
in aperture, detected certain faint dusky lines pro- 
jecting from the gray-green regions well into the 
interior of the orange continents. The streaks 
appeared to be most conspicuously visible shortly 
after the mid-winter of the hemisphere in which 
they appeared. At the rather less favourable 
opposition of 1879, the streaks first seen were traced, 
accompanied by others; to Schiaparelli they ap- 
peared to be more sharply defined than before; 
while one of them appeared to be double, consisting 
of a pair of parallel streaks separated by a distance 
of between one and two hundred miles. As before, 
as well as at succeeding oppositions, the streaks, 
to which Schiaparelli had now given the most un- 
fortunate name of "canals", appeared more clearly 
during the latter part of the Martian winter and 
the early spring. At succeeding and increasingly 
unfavourable oppositions, the numbers, length, 



The Recent Study of Mars. 125 

and instances of duplication, of the canals were 
steadily increased; in character they seemed to be 
more rectilinear and more sharply defined ; and, 
to Schiaparelli, they at length appeared to form 
a reticulated network, extended over nearly the 
whole of the orange continents. Until 1896 to 
no other observer had the canals so much as ap- 
peared, but in that year a few were recognized 
by Perrotin and Thollon at Nice, by the aid of a 
then newly - constructed telescope of 29 inches of 
aperture. As oppositions again became more 
favourable, however, they appeared to quite a 
number of astronomers supplied with the most 
ordinary instrumental means; and they have now 
become entirely notorious. 

According to the evidence of astronomers to 
whom they have appeared, the canals are faint 
lines that appear to become finer and straighter 
as the eye becomes accustomed to their appearance. 
Their width is estimated as being not less than 
fifteen, or more than sixty, miles. They follow, 
as closely as can be seen, the course of great circles 
upon the surface of the planet, 1 and can be fre- 
quently traced for upwards of 1500 miles. They 
mutually intersect in a most remarkable manner, 
several of them frequently passing through the 
same point, from which, again, it is not uncommon 
to find other canals originating, so that the entire 

1 A great circle of a sphere is the circle that divides it into two equal parts. 
It is the largest circle that can be drawn upon the surface, and its course 
marks the shortest line that can be drawn between two points on the surface. 
Great circles are illustrated in meridians of longitude. Parallels of latitude 
are known as small circles. 



126 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

surface of the planet appears as if involved in a 
complicated network of delicate tracery. Before 
the year 1894, canals had only been recognized 
upon the orange continents; but as the planet 
approached opposition in that year they appeared 
to Mr. Douglass at Flagstaff to be distributed 
scarcely less richly over the green of the so-called 
seas. Points of intersection of canals are frequently 
emphasized by the occurrence at them of round or 
oval dusky spots, which have received the name of 
" lakes". The system of canals and their associated 
lakes varies in visibility with the Martian seasons, 
being commonly invisible during winter, gradually 
appearing in the early spring, and again disappear- 
ing during the progress of late summer and autumn. 
It has been suggested that the canals of Mars 
are waterways, and that their emergence from 
invisibility upon the approach of spring may be 
due, either to the dissipation of their winter cover- 
ing of ice and snow, or from their becoming 
extensively flooded by large volumes of water dis- 
charged into them by the melting of the polar 
snows. Their light revealed no trace of polarization 
when examined by Professor W. H. Pickering, 
from which he has advanced the conjecture that 
the streaks may be tracts of country lying upon 
either side of water-courses, themselves too fine 
for detection, and irrigated by them, rather than 
water -courses themselves; and that their appear- 
ance in the spring may be due to a general growth 
of early vegetation over them as they become 
fertilized by the flooding of the streams. 



The Recent Study of Mars. 127 

The apparent regularity of the canals, as well as 
the difficulty of suggesting any other explanation 
for them, have been at times regarded as indicating 
artificiality. According to Mr. Lowell, who is a 
strong advocate of this view, the canals and their 
connected lakes, which, according to this view, 
may be more suitably regarded as oases, are the 
visible result of an extensive system of irrigation 
carried out by intelligent beings on Mars. For the 
inhabitants of Mars, as for man, water is a necessity 
of life; and since water appears to be scarce on the 
planet, being, indeed, apparently only to be ob- 
tained from the melting of the polar snows, the 
inhabitants have, with consummate engineering 
skill, constructed an extensive network of channels, 
extending from the polar regions over the entire 
surface of the planet. By these channels, upon the 
melting of the polar snow, the lower lands are well 
supplied with water, the vegetation springing up 
on them giving rise to the appearance of the gray- 
green tracts ; while the irrigation of the higher and 
desert districts is confined to the immediate neigh- 
bourhood of the channels, and results in growth of 
vegetation over belts of country irrigated by them 
on either side, and the oases at their junctions. 
From these follow the appearances of the " canals" 
and " lakes". 

So much for the outlines of a romance, the lead- 
ing features of which have become, largely through 
the co-operation of "our own correspondent" and 
Mr. Lowell, familiar to the greater number of 
readers of the daily press about the times of recent 



128 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

oppositions of Mars. To those not practically ac- 
quainted with the extreme delicacy involved in the 
telescopic observation of detail so faint as just to 
hover upon the verge of the visible and the unsee- 
able, it must appear that, to the concurrent testi- 
mony of so many laborious observations, conducted 
by astronomers, some of established reputation, and 
the greater number of unquestioned honesty of 
purpose, there can be but one interpretation; and 
that, upon the surface of Mars, features and a sys- 
tem alike unique in the revelations of the Universe 
have been firmly established. The examination of 
more complete evidence, however, suggests grave 
objections to the unhesitating acceptance of this 
view, while to many thoughtful observers it has 
appeared hard to escape from the conclusion that 
the complicated meshes of the canal system upon 
Mars must be regarded as little more than optical 
illusions, faulty interpretations of the faintest shades 
of tint, the exact nature of which has not so far 
been established. 

Although originally discovered, and the courses 
of many of them traced, by the aid of a telescope of 
scarcely more than 8 inches in aperture ; although 
continually seen in England and elsewhere through 
instruments of still less power; and although, by 
such aid, the surface of Mars has been mapped by 
harsh black lines in a manner that suggests the 
transformation of a world into a gigantic shunting- 
yard, the canals, at any rate in their generally 
assumed characteristics, have consistently refrained 
from appearing upon the picture of the planet 



The Recent Study of Mars. 129 

formed in many of the finest telescopes in the 
world, directed by astronomers who, in other and 
independent work, have earned the highest reputa- 
tion for keenness of vision. Through the Wash- 
ington refractor of 26 inches of aperture, the 
instrument by which, in 1877, Professor Hall first 
detected the moons of Mars, the canals have never 
been traced. Dr. Keeler, of the Alleghany Obser- 
vatory, made a special study of Mars when near its 
opposition in 1892 with a refractor of 13 inches of 
aperture. During the course of the observations 
the definition of the planetary outlines was fre- 
quently so excellent that the moons of Mars were 
clearly visible in the field of view; but although 
certain ill-defined shaded streaks were recognized 
near the recorded positions of canals, no trace of 
their hard rectilinear character, or of their marvel- 
lously reticulated system, was detected. Near the 
time of the opposition of 1894, Mr. Barnard, at the 
Lick Observatory, frequently directed the great 
telescope of 36 inches of aperture, the instrument 
by which he had already discovered the fifth moon 
of Jupiter, towards Mars. At times, when the 
seeing was most perfect, although the gray-green 
regions of the planet appeared richly covered by 
delicate and intricate detail, the very suspicion of 
which had never been suggested to other observers 
to whom the canals had been so startlingly con- 
spicuous, features were, indeed, recognized upon 
the orange continents, but they were for the most 
part irregular, and consisted only of delicate gra- 
dations of light and shade. There was no appear- 

(M520) I 



130 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

ance of hard, sharp lines. A few short, hazy 
streaks in the neighbourhood of the "Lake of the 
Sun " appeared as nearly the sole representatives of 
the Martian canals. 

To explain the inconsistency apparent in these 
and other similar observations, it is not for a 
moment necessary to assume any want of good 
faith on the part of astronomers to whom the 
system of the Martian canals has appeared in all 
its wonderful complexity. Experience has fully 
shown, as eveiy observer with the telescope has 
soon become painfully aware, to what a serious 
extent the eye may be deceived in its interpretation 
of details so faint as just to hover upon the verge 
of vision, and how readily unconscious bias, the 
result of even faintly preconceived ideas, may affect 
the judgment. Illustrations are abundantly sup- 
plied in the history of astronomical observation, and 
it will be sufficient to give three, selected almost 
entirely at random. In comparing recent photo- 
graphs of the nebulas surrounding the star tj Argus 
with the beautiful drawing of the same object made 
by Sir John Herschel during his residence at the 
Cape, differences of so startling a nature are found 
as to administer a severe shock to those who would 
put their trust in the eyes of man. The curiously 
definite border assigned, even by so careful an 
observer as Sir John Herschel, to a dark space in 
the nebula, known as the "key-hole", when com- 
pared with the perfect shading of light into dark- 
ness shown in the photograph, is an indication of 
the tendency of the eye to assign to excessively 



The Recent Study of Mars. 131 

faint details a sharpness and a regularity that they 
do not possess. In inspecting sketches of the 
delicate detail of the Corona of the Sun, made at 
the same time and from the same place by different 
observers, it is frequently difficult to believe that 
the same object has been represented. Drawings 
of the Milky Way, as seen by the naked eye, have 
been recently executed by two independent obser- 
vers, Dr. Boeddicker and M. Easton, each drawing 
the result of long and arduous observation, but, in 
comparing them, it is the exception rather than the 
rule to find any approximation in agreement in 
respect of the more delicate features. 

Altogether it appears scarcely possible to avoid 
the conclusion that the existence of the canal system 
has not been established. There is no doubt, how- 
ever, that in the course of a few years further light 
will be forthcoming upon the problem. At present 
the planet is becoming at each appearance less 
favourably situated for observation; but upon the 
return of favourable oppositions in 1907 and 1909, 
its disc will be scanned with an attention thoroughly 
aroused by the conflict of recent evidence, and with 
the aid of more powerful instrumental means than 
have hitherto been available. It might also be well 
if each observer should, before attacking the main 
problem, subject himself to a severe examination, 
in sketching through his telescope a number of 
illuminated distant discs, on which faint markings 
had been traced, but of a nature unknown to him. 
A personal tendency might be detected by the 
subsequent comparison of the drawings with the 



132 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

discs, which should serve as a valuable check upon 
his subsequent observations of Mars. By the com- 
parison of a number of such carefully corrected 
records, it might be confidently anticipated that the 
riddle of the canals of Mars would receive its final 
solution. 

It has frequently appeared a grave difficulty in 
interpreting Martian phenomena that the apparently 
mild climate, to which they have been generally 
thought to point as existing upon the planet, is 
inconsistent with its great distance from the Sun. 
There can be little doubt that if the Earth were re- 
moved to the distance of Mars, it would, by reason 
of the diminished intensity of solar radiation, become 
so much cooler, that nearly if not the whole of its 
oceans would be eternally bound in ice. Yet upon 
Mars the polar caps do not extend to lower latitudes 
than do those of the Earth, while the polar ice on the 
Earth is never reduced during the hottest summer 
to the insignificant remnant by which it is generally 
represented in summer upon Mars. From these 
facts it has frequently been assumed that the climate 
of Mars is actually warmer than that of the Earth. 

Although it is not possible to make an exact esti- 
mate of the fall of temperature that would result if 
the Earth were removed to the distance of Mars from 
the Sun, a simple illustration will indicate its very 
serious extent. Taking the approximate ratio of 2 
to 3 to indicate the relative distances of the Earth 
and Mars from the Sun, it follows that, since the 
intensity of radiation is inversely proportional to the 
square of the distance of the radiating body, the 



The Recent Study of Mars. 133 

heating effect of the Sun's rays at every place upon 
the Earth's surface would be reduced by the square 
of %, that is, to 4/9 of its present value. The heat- 
ing effect of rays further depends, however, upon 
the angle at which they are incident upon the surface 
that absorbs them. The greater the obliquity, the 
less the heat developed upon equal areas, since the 
more slanting the incidence the larger the area over 
which the rays of a given columnar bundle would 
be distributed. In passing from the equator to 
either pole, for instance, the heating effect of the 
Sun's rays continually decreases, as the surface 
covered by bundles of rays of equal section increases. 
Let us now suppose the Earth to be at an equinox, 
and that it is regarded by an observer stationed upon 
the Sun. Imagine two parallel zones, each a mile 
in width, to be described entirely round the Earth 
upon its surface, one at the equator, and the other 
in latitude 63. It can be shown by an exercise in 
elementary geometry that the second is, by reason 
of its lesser circumference, 4 / 9 of the first in area, and 
that, as seen from the Sun, it appears from this cause, 
and also from its obliquity to the direction of vision, 
to be (V 9 ) 2 or l6 / 8l as large as the equatorial one. 
This fraction then is the proportion between the 
angles subtended at the Sun by the zones, and it 
therefore also represents that of the quantities of 
heat received by them in equal times. The smaller 
zone therefore receives ( 4 /g) 2 of the heat of the larger, 
but, as its surface is only / 9 as great, the heat re- 
ceived by a given area of the smaller zone is 4 / 9 of 
that received by an equal area of the larger one. 



134 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

But it has been shown that, if the distance of the 
Earth from the Sun were increased to that of Mars, 
the heating effect of the solar rays everywhere upon 
its surface would be reduced by this amount. Hence 
the equatorial heating effect upon the Earth, if it 
were transferred to the position of Mars, would be 
that at present found in a zone of 63 latitude. The 
parallel of 63 north latitude skirts the south of Ice- 
land, it passes through Finland, and it traverses 
Northern Siberia, Alaska, the Hudson Bay Terri- 
tory, and Greenland; and there is little doubt that 
the temperatures of these regions are upon the whole 
higher than would result from the direct radiation 
that they receive, since the Arctic and adjacent 
regions are warmed by currents of air from lower 
latitudes. Were the Earth, therefore, transferred 
to the distance of Mars, it might be confidently 
anticipated that, even at its equator, its climate 
would be of Arctic character. 

The phenomena visible upon Mars do, however, 
suggest, though they do not probably demonstrate 
as conclusively as has frequently been assumed, that 
the temperature of the planet is very different from 
this, and attempts have been made to imagine some 
means by which the climate of the planet may be 
rendered less rigorous than its small allowance of 
solar heat would suggest. The possibility, one 
indeed that has never been seriously maintained, 
that the interior of Mars may be hotter than the 
Earth, and that its surface may be appreciably 
warmed by the outward flow of heat from its in- 
terior, may be briefly dismissed. It is probable 



The Recent Study of Mars. 135 

that the interior of Mars, like the interior of the 
Earth, is hotter than the surface ; but from the pro- 
bability indicated by the nebular hypothesis, that 
Mars was developed in a highly heated condition 
before rather than after the Earth, and from the 
certainty that its cooling must, by reason of its 
smaller size, have proceeded far more rapidly, Mars 
should be the colder of the two planets. Since, in 
addition, measurements have shown that the heat 
conducted from the interior to the surface, even in 
the case of the Earth, is entirely insignificant in 
amount when compared with that received from the 
Sun, and is, therefore, a negligible quantity in 
directly affecting climate, it would appear impossible 
that the climate of Mars should be sensibly affected 
by the internal heat of the planet. 

The only serious attempt that has been made to 
account for the assumed mild climate of Mars is 
based upon the property of selective absorption, 
exercised in some degree by all, and in a very 
marked manner by many, transparent substances. 
Selective absorption is illustrated to a remarkable 
degree in glass. If a plate of clear glass be held 
between the Sun and a thermometer, the bulb of 
which should be blackened upon the exterior to 
prevent the reflection of rays from the metallic sur- 
face of the enclosed mercury, it will be found that 
the indication of the thermometer is scarcely affected, 
the glass, transparent to light, being similarly trans- 
parent to the greater part of the rays that, upon their 
incidence on the blackened surface of the thermo- 
meter, develop heat. If, however, the same glass is 



136 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

interposed in the course of rays proceeding from a 
red-hot fire to the thermometer, a fall in temperature 
will be indicated, almost as great in amount as if an 
opaque screen had been substituted for the glass. 
Glass, therefore, is very transparent to the heat 
radiation of the Sun, but is practically opaque to 
that of a red-hot fire. It is to this last property that 
the efficiency of a glass fire-screen is due. Speaking 
generally, it is found that the higher the temperature 
of a body the more transparent is glass to the heat- 
ing effect of its radiation; and this, not from the 
greater intensity of the radiation of a hotter body 
for the experiment already described succeeds equally 
well even if, as may well be the case, the glass is 
placed so close to the fire that its radiation is, owing 
to its close proximity, more intense than that of the 
Sun on its arrival at the surface of the Earth but 
by reason of some property impressed upon the 
radiation by the source. The wave theory of light, 
and of radiation in general, leaves little doubt that 
the difference in question is one of rapidity of the 
vibration of the ether of space as it transmits the 
waves that constitute radiation, but it is unnecessary 
here to go beyond the actual property of selective 
absorption as demonstrated by experiment. 

The familiar fact that upon a clear day the air in- 
side a greenhouse may be raised by the Sun's rays 
to a temperature far in excess of that outside, is 
frequently advanced as an illustration of the effects 
of selective absorption, though probably in this case 
the prevention of circulation of the enclosed air is 
partly responsible for the rise in temperature. The 



The Recent Study of Mars. 137 

rays of solar radiation traversing the glass with 
readiness arrive at and are absorbed by the surfaces 
of the plants and other objects exposed to them. 
These, becoming heated in consequence, radiate 
their acquired heat in rays of essentially different 
character, which, being effectually absorbed by the 
glass covering, cause it to be heated by them. 
Consequently the interior, heated now both by 
radiation from the Sun and from the warmed glass, 
acquires a temperature which is frequently far in 
excess of that which would result if the glass had 
allowed a free path to the radiation from the objects 
within. 

Tyndall has shown that a closely similar selective 
absorption may be exercised by many gases and 
vapours. He was unable to detect the property 
with certainty in dry air, but the presence of a very 
small quantity of the vapour of water in the air 
produced it in a marked degree. From the results 
of experiments arranged with considerable care and 
skill, he arrived at the conclusion that the vapour of 
water present in the atmosphere exercises an im- 
portant influence upon the meteorology of the Earth, 
permitting the transmission through the air of the 
solar rays, but largely arresting the heat upon its 
return, by absorbing the radiation from the warmed 
Earth. It appeared, indeed, that under conditions 
in which the atmosphere contains an average amount 
of water- vapour in England, as much as 10 per 
cent of the Earth's total radiation should be arrested 
within 10 feet of its surface. 

Based upon the selective absorption of water- 



138 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

vapour, the interesting speculation has been ad- 
vanced that a mild climate upon Mars may result 
from the distribution throughout its atmosphere of 
water-vapour, in quantity so abundant that, by the 
efficiency of its trapping effect upon the solar radia- 
tion, it should more than atone for the great distance 
of the planet from the Sun. There is, however, 
considerable difficulty in imagining such a state of 
saturation of the Martian atmosphere as probable, 
or even possible. Although the physical conditions 
at the surface of Mars do appear to be in some re- 
spects favourable to the formation of water-vapour 
in its atmosphere, in others they appear to be ex- 
tremely unfavourable ; and though it is not possible 
to estimate accurately the opposing conditions, there 
can be little doubt of the unfavourable ones being 
the far more effective of the two. 

The conditions upon Mars favourable to the 
existence of the vapour of water in its atmosphere, 
consist in the low intensity of gravitation at the 
surface of the planet, and the probable tenuity of 
its atmosphere. The amount of water that is ca- 
pable of existence in an atmosphere in the state of 
vapour is entirely independent of the density of 
the atmosphere; experiment showing that although 
evaporation takes place more rapidly into rare air 
than into dense, yet the amount of vapour ultimately 
formed is the same, and is still the same even if 
the space into which evaporation takes place was 
initially a vacuum. In every case evaporation pro- 
ceeds until the vapour immediately in contact with 
the evaporating surface has acquired a definite 



The Recent Study of Mars. 139 

density, a density increasing with, and solely de- 
pending upon, the temperature, after which evapora- 
tion ceases. In the case of a planet, evaporation 
of surface-water would therefore continue until an 
atmosphere of the vapour of water had been formed 
that should, independently of any other atmosphere 
present, and therefore solely by its own weight, 
produce such a density in the vapour at the surface 
as would prevent further evaporation. Since the 
intensity of gravitation at the surface of the Earth 
is two and a half times that at the surface of Mars, 
an extension of water vapour two and a half times 
that necessary to prevent evaporation at the surface 
of the Earth would be possible in the atmosphere of 
Mars. 

In the preceding argument it was necessary to 
assume a very simple condition that evaporation 
rhould steadily continue until the whole atmosphere 
had become saturated. It is scarcely necessary to 
add, that, in the atmosphere of the Earth, this is 
very far from being the case. Owing to alterations 
in temperature in extensive bodies of air due to 
different meteorological changes condensation is 
continually occurring, resulting in the formation 
of cloud and mist, and the atmosphere of the Earth 
as a whole is, at all times, very far from being 
saturated. No doubt such condensation would also 
occur on Mars, but it is probable, from the low 
intensity of gravitation, that the meteorological 
changes would be less violent, and that condensa- 
tion would therefore be less copious. Also, under 
conditions otherwise similar, evaporation would 



140 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

take place more rapidly into the rarer atmosphere, 
and the loss of vapour due to condensation would 
be more quickly restored. Perhaps the most de- 
finite form in which it is possible to express the 
general conclusion is that if the intensity of gravi- 
tation upon the surface of the earth were reduced, 
and if, at the same time, the density of its atmos- 
phere were diminished, there is little doubt that 
the atmosphere as a whole would be more richly 
charged with the vapour of water than it actu- 
ally is. 

In some respects, therefore, the physical condi- 
tions existing on Mars appear to be favourable to 
the formation of the vapour of water in its atmos- 
phere. On the other hand, other conditions appear 
to be so extremely unfavourable that it is difficult 
to believe that these can be of much avail. Evapora- 
tion is the direct result of the radiation of the Sun 
acting upon the surface of water. Not only is 
the intensity of the solar radiation upon Mars less 
than one-half of its amount on the surface of the 
Earth, but the water surface exposed to it appears 
to be woefully restricted. The greater part of the 
Earth's surface is occupied by water. A nearly 
continuous tropical belt of ocean is exposed day 
after day to the direct radiation of a vertical sun. 
Upon Mars, on the contrary, the tropics are al- 
most completely occupied by the orange continents. 
Gray-green regions, the aqueous character of which 
is more than doubtful, extend over the temperate 
zones. It is only in the arctic regions the arctic 
regions of a planet whose tropics receive heat 



The Recent Study of Mars. 141 

from the Sun that compares unfavourably in its 
amount with that received by lands of ice and snow 
upon the Earth that there is, in the polar snows, 
any indication of water in either the solid or the 
liquid state. The faith of a keen believer in the 
habitability of Mars may see under such conditions 
an atmosphere heavily laden with moisture, but to 
us it appears that poor success has accompanied 
the attempt to warm Mars by a cloak of vapour. 

Further, it appears certain that the trapping effect 
of the vapour of water has been much overestimated. 
If we accept Tyndall's estimate, that under average 
conditions in this country, 10 per cent of the heat 
radiated by the Earth is absorbed within 10 feet of 
its surface, it follows, as has been pointed out by 
Lord Kelvin, that so high a rate of absorption can- 
not continue; for if it did, 10 per cent of the heat 
escaping absorption in the first 10 feet being ab- 
sorbed in the next 10, and so on, 90 per cent, or 
nearly the whole, would be absorbed in 200 feet, a 
conclusion that is directly contradicted by the very 
marked effect of cloud in checking the fall of tem- 
perature by radiation from the Earth's surface. It 
is probable that water vapour absorbs only a few 
waves of definite lengths among the many compos- 
ing terrestrial radiation, that the very rapid absorp- 
tion of these gives rise to the strongly-marked effect 
actually observed, but that the remaining waves, 
bereft of their more susceptible companions, escape 
without much further loss. 

To reconcile the dissipation of the polar caps with 
the intense cold that it appears necessary to regard 



142 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

as prevailing over the Martian world, it has been 
suggested by Mr. Cowper Ranyard and other 
astronomers that the Martian snows may be the 
solidified form of some liquid other than water, and 
freezing at a lower temperature. The occurrence of 
carbonic acid gas as a constituent, howbeit a minor 
one, of the Earth's atmosphere, and the fact that 
by extreme cold it becomes condensed as a white 
powder, very closely resembling snow in appear- 
ance and melting at a temperature of about 120 
Fahrenheit degrees below the freezing-point of 
water, has pointed to it as the origin of the polar 
caps on Mars. There are, however, very serious 
objections to this view. Under ordinary conditions 
of pressure, carbonic acid is incapable of assuming 
the liquid state, the solid upon being heated passing 
directly into the condition of gas. Under consider- 
able pressure, however, the heated solid does melt, 
the resulting liquid boiling at a still higher tem- 
perature and becoming a gas. The least pressure 
necessary for this purpose is about five times that 
of the atmosphere at the surface of the Earth. 
Hence for liquid carbonic acid to exist on Mars, 
in consequence of the low intensity of gravitation, 
12^ times the mass of air must be accumulated 
over each square mile as is accumulated over a 
square mile of the Earth, an estimate that cannot 
possibly be accepted. If, therefore, the polar snows 
consist of solid carbonic acid, they must be formed 
by a direct precipitation of the hoar-frost of carbonic 
acid, and their disappearance must be a similarly 
direct process of evaporation. This conclusion is 



The Recent Study of Mars. 143 

directly challenged by the appearance to Mr. Lowell 
and Professor Pickering of the blue-black belt fring- 
ing the disappearing cap of 1894, and the evidence 
that it furnished as to its liquid nature. 

The actual deposition and dissipation of the hoar- 
frost of water is not inconsistent with a temperature 
considerably below the freezing-point, since direct 
evaporation takes place from ice at such low tem- 
peratures. Were it not for the evidence of the 
fringing belt, the gray-green regions might well be 
ice-bound seas, from which evaporation would take 
place under the cloudless Martian skies. The air 
would thus become charged to a slight extent with 
the vapour of water, which, distributed over the 
planet by atmospheric circulation, would be ulti- 
mately deposited as frost on the coldest polar 
regions. 

In common with the greater number of other 
celestial objects to which it has become possible to 
apply a detailed examination, Mars has passed 
through a first stage in which it appeared a simple 
and an easy thing to interpret the features revealed, 
and has reached another, in which the first pleasing 
views have been rudely shaken, as observation has 
revealed difficulties at a far greater rate than it has 
solved them. Could we but traverse the millions 
of miles of planetary space that separate us from 
our ruddy neighbour, and dwell for a time upon 
its surface, we should look around us in vain for 
evidence of that fair miniature of the world we had 
left that formed the romantic picture of our fathers. 
It is more likely that we should find in Mars a 



144 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

succession of bleak arid deserts over which the rays 
of the vertical Sun would seem to struggle in vain 
to mitigate the blasting chill of the attenuated air. 
We should find, in higher latitudes, a succession 
of plains, clothed, perhaps, with elementary forms 
of vegetation capable of withstanding the rigours 
of a climate more than arctic in character. We 
should possibly encounter animal life, but assuredly 
in no familiar form. With the whole aspect of 
nature it would be difficult to associate romance, 
and we should be well content for the future to limit 
our acquaintance with the planet to the softened 
picture presented in the field of view of a telescope 
mounted on the more genial Earth. 



Chapter IV. 
The Analysis of Sunlight. 

In the year 1672 Sir Isaac Newton published, 
among other discoveries in optics, the account of 
an experiment, in principle closely agreeing with 
one less perfectly arranged and interpreted by 
John Kepler more than half a century before, that 
was to form the foundation of a new branch of 
physics ; one that, in its application to Astronomy 
a century and a half later, was destined to renew 
the youth of the oldest of the sciences, not unfre- 
quently regarded then as approaching the termina- 
tion of its active career and as having achieved its 
last triumphs. Newton's experiment was that of 



The Analysis of Sunlight. 145 

the analysis of sunlight, and the science that owes 
its origin to it is Spectrum Analysis. 

In Newton's experiment, a circular hole was 
bored in the shutter of an otherwise darkened room, 
and through it, when the Sun was unclouded in 
the sky beyond, a beam of sunlight penetrated the 
room, and, following a straight course, formed an 
oval spot of white light upon the opposite wall. A 
prism a block of triangular section of glass was 
then placed in the path of the beam and immediately 
against the shutter, and, as the result, the white spot 
disappeared, and was replaced by a luminous band 
of coloured light considerably displaced from it in 
position. The band displayed from one end to the 
other a series of colours which closely corresponded 
with those seen in the rainbow, red appearing 
nearest the original position of the white spot, and 
violet at the end farthest from it. 

From the fact of the displacement of the luminous 
image on the wall, the prism clearly exercised a 
deflecting effect upon the beam of light; and New- 
ton accounted for the appearance of colour by the 
supposition that the light of the Sun was compound 
in nature, being, in fact, a mixture of all colours of 
the rainbow ; that the combined effect of the whole 
upon the eye was to develop the sensation of white ; 
but that the differently-coloured rays were deflected 
in different degrees in traversing the prism; red 
experiencing the least, violet the greatest, deflection, 
while the colours appearing between these were 
deflected to intermediate and different extents. The 
complete series he described as red, orange, yellow, 

(M520) K 



146 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

green, blue, indigo, and violet; but it is probable 
that to most eyes the blue and indigo would appear 
as only different shades of the same colour. New- 
ton supported his explanation by a number of simple 
though ingeniously-arranged experiments, and no 
doubt has since existed as to its soundness. 

Fig. 7 represents, in simple diagrammatic form, 




Fig. 7. Newton's Experiment 

a vertical section of the arrangement of Newton's 
experiment, and requires but little explanation, s 
is the section of the shutter, A that of the circular 
hole. The Sun being in the direction of AC, a 
beam that is, a bundle of its rays arrives from 
along CA, enters the hole, and in the absence of the 
prism would traverse the room and form a white 
spot upon the opposite wall at B. Upon interpos- 
ing the prism, however, at P, the rays suffer deflec- 



The Analysis of Sunlight. 147 

tion, and are thrown upward, forming a coloured 
band between the limits R and v, the least deviated 
the red rays arriving at R, and the most deviated 
the violet at v, while the original white spot 
disappears. 

The reader, if generally unacquainted with the 
first principles of optics, will probably find it well 
to trace the action of the prism on light in the more 
thorough manner developed in the next few para- 
graphs, but, should the above explanation appear 
entirely satisfactory and complete, these may be 
passed over. 

It is a matter of common experience that light 
behaves normally at any rate, to a very close 
degree of approximation as if it travelled along 
straight lines. Were it not so, a distant object 
would not become hidden by the interposition of an 
opaque screen in the straight line between it and 
the eye. As a matter of fact, refined observations 
of the phenomena included under the term "diffrac- 
tion" indicate that the transmission of light is not 
completely expressed in so simple a statement, but 
no error will arise from its assumption in the pres- 
ent instance. To light thus regarded as proceeding 
along a straight line, the term " ray" is applied. 

A ray of light continues its path in a straight line, 
however, only for so long as the substance or 
medium through which it is transmitted is of 
absolute uniformity. It is a matter of common 
knowledge that, in passing from one medium into 
another, the course of light is deflected or " re- 
fracted" at the separating surface. Thus, in fig. 8, 



148 



Recent Advances in Astronomy. 



let PQ indicate the course of a ray in air incident 
upon the surface of water at Q. The path of the 
ray within the water will still be along a straight 
line QR, but this will not be the continuation of its 
former direction. It has been found that, in travel- 
ling from a rarer into a denser medium, a ray of 
light is commonly refracted towards the normal or 

perpendicular to 
/ T the separating sur- 

face at the point 
of incidence; and 
that, conversely, in 
its passage from a 
denser into a rarer 
one, it is deflected 
from the normal. 
Thus, the ray PQ, 
if continued in its 
original direction, 
would proceed 

along QS; but, on 
entering the water, 

it is actually deflected towards the normal NN' into the 
direction QR. In travelling the reverse way, a ray, 
following the course RQ while within water, would, 
upon entering air, be deflected from the normal into 
the direction QP. Only a ray incident normally upon 
a separating surface penetrates it without experienc- 
ing refraction. From the refraction of light follows 
the familiar fact that an object in one medium, when 
viewed from another, generally appears to be in a 
direction different from that in which it really is- 




Fig. 8. Refraction of Light. 



The Analysis of Sunlight. 



149 



Thus, once more referring to the figure, one of the 
rays proceeding from an object situated at R would 
follow the paths RQ and QP in succession, and, 
should it enter the eye at P, the object will appear 
as if it were in the direction PS, since it is from this 
direction that the ray arrives. By analogous reason- 
ing, an object at P, as seen by an eye situated below 
the surface of water at R, would seem to be in the 
direction RT. 

The amount of deflection experienced by a ray in 
the act of refraction depends upon the angle at 
which it is incident upon the refracting surface, as 
well as upon the natures of the two media. The 
exact law by which it is determined was discovered 
by Snell about the year 1621, but its statement is 
unnecessary for the purpose of the present study. 
The fact of re- 
fraction, as well 
as Snell's law, 
are simply ex- 
plained by the 
wave theory of 
light. 

In fig. 9 
the paths are 
traced of three 
rays traversing 
a transparent 

prism of glass, the amount of refraction being in 
each case calculated from Snell's law. The manner 
in which the rays are always deflected towards the 
normal upon entering the glass, and from the nor- 




Fig. 9. Paths of Rays traced through a 
Glass Prism. 



150 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

mal on leaving it, should be carefully followed, 
and the construction of similar diagrams for other 
prisms of different vertical angles would form an 
instructive exercise. It is found that in every case 
the ray, by its passage through a prism, is deflected 
from the refracting edge, or that at which the two 
faces concerned in the refraction meet. 

Experimenting with lights of different colours, it 
is found that they experience refraction in different 
degrees, red experiencing the least and violet the 
greatest deviation. In this lies the complete ex- 
planation of Newton's experiment. A very great 
number of colours and shades of colour are present 
in the light of the Sun. All of them coexist 
throughout the whole of the beam that enters the 
room. On traversing the prism, the violet rays in 
the beam are deflected far from the refracting edge, 
and by themselves would form a violet spot on the 
wall, largely displaced from the position of the 
original white one. The red rays would by them- 
selves form a red spot, displaced to a less extent, 
while each colour and shade of colour would form a 
corresponding spot of coloured light between these 
two extremes. The coloured band or spectrum 
is therefore formed by a number of coloured spots, 
one formed by each colour and shade of colour 
present in the original light 

This explanation of the formation of the spectrum, 
although beyond doubt the correct one, is not free 
from difficulty, for it is truly wonderful that the 
very definite and distinct sensations of colour that 
are produced by the rays separately should so 



The Analysis of Sunlight. 151 

entirely disappear in the white that results from the 
excitement of all of them simultaneously. One of 
the most direct evidences of the soundness of the 
theory is that when, as may be effected by several 
simple methods, the colours of the spectrum are 
recombined, a perfect white, indistinguishable from 
the original, appears as the result of the mixture. 

The number of colours represented in the spec- 
trum of sunlight, as apparent to a normal eye, is 
generally regarded as seven, though it is probable 
that most observers would suggest six. Since the 
different colours owe their appearance to their being 
refrangible in different degrees, the experiment may 
at first suggest the view that there are in sunlight 
seven, and only seven, different kinds of light, each 
of a definite refrangibility. If this were the case, 
the spectrum would be formed of seven coloured 
patches. If the hole in the shutter were large, the 
section of the beam, and consequently each coloured 
patch, would be correspondingly large: and ad- 
jacent, or even non-adjacent patches, might overlap ; 
but, by making the hole small, and so restricting 
the section of the beam, it should be possible to get 
rid of this confusion, since the angular separation 
effected by the prism would remain unchanged, 
while each coloured patch would decrease in size. 
Thus, let the row of seven black dots repeated in 
the first three lines of fig. 10 represent by their 
positions the amount of separation of the supposed 
seven different kinds of light in sunlight. Then, 
with a very small hole in the shutter, seven small, 
separate, and differently-coloured spots would ap- 



152 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

pear, as indicated in the first line; while, by increas- 
ing the aperture, the size of the spots would 
increase and overlapping would occur, as repre- 
sented in the second and third lines, a spectrum 
being formed, in which, as in the actual spectrum 

of sunlight, each col- 
our would pass into 
the next by insensible 
gradations. 

That the perfect 
gradation of tint in 
the spectrum of sun- 
light is not due to the 
overlapping of only 
seven differently-col- 
oured patches, is, how- 




Fig. 10. Formation of Pure and 
Impure Spectra. 



ever, shown by the 
fact that it is quite im- 
possible to reduce the 
aperture to such dim- 
ensions that the spec- 
trum shall be resolved into separate patches of 
colour. However small the aperture, and however 
distant the screen, the removal of which to a greater 
distance would have the same effect in tending to 
separate the coloured patches as reducing the 
aperture, the different patches pass the one into the 
other by perfectly insensible gradations. It is 
true that, with sunlight, breaks in the band might 
ultimately appear, due, as will be seen later, to 
another cause; but by substituting the light of a 
candle- or lamp-flame for that of the Sun, the 



The Analysis of Sunlight. 153 

spectrum would continue unbroken from end to 
end. 

The impossibility of separating the coloured 
patches indicates that there are, for all practical 
purposes, an infinite number of colours in the light 
of the Sun or that of a candle. The description of 
the spectrum as consisting of seven colours indi- 
cates that in the gradual transition through the 
infinite series of rays from one extreme of refrangi- 
bility to the other, seven fundamentally different 
sensations are successively excited. The seven 
colours of the spectrum have reference to a physio- 
logical, not to a physical fact. 

Instead of allowing the rays, after their separation 
by the prism, to illuminate a wall or other screen 
before being appreciated by the eye, they may be 
received by the eye directly; and, with most 
sources of light, this is the only means by which a 
sufficiently brilliant result can be obtained. The 
optical principles involved in this method of view- 
ing the spectrum will be clear from the construction 
of fig. n. Here A represents a small hole in a 
screen, supposed to be placed in front of a candle- 
flame, and E the eye of an observer, which should, 
however, be placed in practice immediately behind 
the prism. A ray of red light traversing a definite 
point in the hole will follow some such course as 
ABE, and will enter the eye. As the result, the eye 
will picture the position of A at some point, such as 
R, in the direction from which the ray arrived. 
The red rays traversing all points of the hole will 
behave in a similar manner, and the whole collec- 



'54 



Recent Advances in Astronomy. 



tion will appear as originating from a red circle at 
R. Such a reproduction of the appearance of the 
hole, a ghost from which the rays appear to come, 
is technically called its image. A violet ray 
traversing the same point in the hole, and accom- 



.,< 




Fig. ii. The Principle of the Spectroscope. 

panying the original red ray along AB, will 
experience, in traversing the prism, a greater 
deflection than the red ray, and will be thrown into 
the direction ABC. It will, therefore, miss the 
eye altogether, and will be ineffective; but some 
other violet ray, such as AD, starting in a direction 
still more removed than the red ray from the direc- 
tion of the eye, will, by its greater refraction by the 
prism, enter the eye, and will appear as if it came 
from v. The red rays, therefore, will develop in 
the eye an appearance of a red image of the hole at 
R, and the violet rays will similarly develop the 



The Analysis of Sunlight. 155 

appearance of a violet image of the hole at v. 
Every other colour present in the light will similarly 
develop a corresponding image of the hole in its 
own colour, in position intermediate between R and 
v, and the entire series, which will of course over- 
lap, as when projected upon a screen, will form the 
spectrum of the light under examination. If the 
screen in front of the candle were removed, the red 
rays emitted by every point of the flame would give 
rise to the appearance of a red flame at R; the 
violet rays to that of a violet flame at v ; and the 
other colours behaving similarly, there would 
result the appearance of a very impure spectrum 
formed by a great number of overlapping pictures 
of the flame in all the colours present in the light. 

In 1802, Wollaston effected a great improvement 
in the method of obtaining the spectrum, by trans- 
mitting the light to be examined through a fine slit 
instead of through a round hole. The slit was ar- 
ranged parallel to the edge of the prism. By this 
arrangement, the overlapping of images was very 
much reduced, or, in technical language, the purity 
of the spectrum was very much increased. Every 
colour present in the light would now be represented 
in the spectrum by a narrow band, which would 
become a fine line if the slit were sufficiently 
narrow; and these would overlap to a far less 
extent than the images of a round hole that should 
allow of the passage of an equal amount of light. 
If, for instance, under the conditions assumed in 
fig. 10, a slit were substituted for the hole, the 
appearance would be as represented in the fourth 



156 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

line, and the confusion occurring in the two im- 
mediately above it would be entirely avoided. It 
is of the highest importance to continually bear in 
mind that the appearance of the spectrum, whether 
formed by projection upon a screen or viewed 
directly by the eye, is due to a series of pictures 
or images of the aperture by which the light is 
admitted ; a separate image being formed by each 
colour, or, more definitely, by each kind of light, 
as determined by its degree of refrangibility, repre- 
sented in the original light. 

Admitting sunlight through such a fine slit, and 
viewing the slit through a glass prism, Wollaston 
perceived the spectrum to be crossed at right angles 
to its length by four diffused dark lines. The lines 
were not seen in the spectrum of a candle-flame or 
with other artificial sources of illumination. A 
first glimpse was thus obtained of a discovery that 
was in a few years to revolutionize the study of the 
Sun and stars. 

In 1814 further refinements were introduced by 
the celebrated instrument-maker, Fraunhofer of 
Munich. Fraunhofer's remarkable skill as an 
optician enabled him to construct prisms of finer 
quality and with faces more truly plane than 
had been found possible before, both points of 
great importance in giving accurate definition to 
the images produced ; while, instead of viewing the 
spectrum directly, it was examined through a tele- 
scope, which received the rays immediately after 
their passage through the prism. As the result, 
the dark lines faintly seen by Wollaston became 



The Analysis of Sunlight. 157 

far more distinct, and their number was increased 
to 576. Some of them were also recognized in the 
spectra of planets and of fixed stars. 

A further refinement, and one by which the pris- 
matic spectroscope practically acquired its present 
form, was effected by Simms, another famous 
instrument-maker, in 1839. The image formed by a 
prism, or by the refraction of light at a single plane 
surface, is not, excepting under special conditions, 
sharply defined. This is due to the fact that, even 
with light of a pure colour, and, therefore, of only 
one degree of refrangibility, rays originating and 
therefore diverging from a point, do not after 
refraction diverge from any one point, a defect that 
arises from the particular form of the law of refrac- 
tion and that we shall make no attempt to explain 
here. Since, owing to its dimensions, the eye 
receives not one ray of light but a number of rays ; 
and since the refracted rays do not diverge from a 
point, the image appears slightly out of focus and 
indistinct. Light is diffused beyond what should 
otherwise be the sharp limits of the image, and 
overlapping of neighbouring images in the spectrum 
is unduly pronounced. If, however, the object is 
so far distant from the prism that the rays falling 
upon the face of the prism are sensibly parallel, all 
are refracted to the same extent, the emergent rays 
are still parallel, and indistinctness of the image 
due to this cause does not occur. Fraunhofer, who 
was the first to appreciate the importance of this 
condition, had been careful to approximate as 
close as possible to it, by placing the prism at a 



158 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

considerable distance in some cases as much as 
24 feet from the slit; but the method was in- 
convenient, and involved a waste of light; since 
the greater number of the rays diverging from the 
slit missed the prism altogether. The improve- 
ment effected by Simms consisted in introducing a 
condensing lens in the path of the rays between the 
slit and the prism, at a distance equal to its focal 
length from the slit. The lens, known as the 
"collimating lens", collected the conical bundle of 
rays diverging from any point of the slit, and con- 
densed them into a sheaf of parallel rays before 
they fell on to the nearest face of the prism. With 
a collimating lens, the slit need not, therefore, be 
farther from the prism than the focal length of the 
lens, which may be only a few inches. By these 
means distortion of the image due to the divergence 
of the incident rays was entirely obviated. 

Reference must be made to one other condition 
of spectral purity, familiar to Newton and to later 
workers upon the analysis of light. It can be 
shown to follow from the form of the law of refrac- 
tion, that, other conditions being the same, the 
definition of the image is least imperfect when the 
path of the ray in the prism makes equal angles 
with the refracting faces, a case illustrated by 
the central of the three rays traced in fig. 9. In 
practical work with the spectroscope, the prism 
is always adjusted for this to be, as nearly as 
possible, the case. The adjustment is made by 
turning the prism to and fro until it is observed 
that the spectral image is displaced from the direc- 



The Analysis of Sunlight. 159 

tion of the slit to the least possible extent; optical 
theory having shown that this condition of " mini- 
mum deviation" is coincident with the desired 
symmetrical passage of the ray through the prism. 
There should now be little difficulty in following 
the theory of the modern prismatic spectroscope, 
a diagrammatic section of which is given in fig. 12. 




Fig. 12. The Spectroscope. 



The slit is formed by bringing the carefully finished 
edges of two metal plates a a, almost into contact. 
By an adjusting screw, one of these can be moved 
towards or away from the other, by which means 
the slit, which is to be regarded as standing perpen- 
dicularly to the paper at A, can be made wide or 
narrow. The rays of light that enter the instrument 
by any point of the slit travel down a metal 
"collimating tube" B. usually from i to 3 feet in 
length, at the end of which they fall upon the colli- 
mating lens c, by which their paths are rendered 
parallel. Since everyone of them falls upon the 
first surface of the prism at the same angle, all 

1 The telescope and the collimator are usually from two to three times 
longer in comparison with their diameters than is represented in the figure, 
in which their sectional dimensions are exaggerated for the sake of clear- 
ness. 



160 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

of the same colour are refracted equally, and their 
courses on traversing the prism, and after leaving 
it, are still parallel. Following now rays of one 
colour only, represented by the unbroken lines in 
the figure, they pass on to the telescope. The 
object-glass o, a condensing lens similar to that 
of the collimator, condenses then to a focus at v. 
On passing this they diverge again, traverse the 
eye-piece, and are received by the eye, to which, 
as the result, the appearance is presented of a line 
of light an image of the slit of a colour defined 
by the nature of the rays, and in position by the 
degree to which their courses have undergone de- 
flection by the prism. Regarding, for instance, the 
rays, the paths of which have been traced, as violet; 
the red, represented by the dotted lines in the figure, 
experiencing less deflection, would be focussed in 
some such position as R, and other rays would be 
condensed in positions intermediate between R and 
v. As in the previous cases, a coloured line appears 
in the field of view for each kind of light radiated 
by the source. When the light has been sufficiently 
powerful to admit of a greater extension of its spec- 
trum without undue enfeeblement of its colours, two 
or more prisms have sometimes been inserted be- 
tween the collimator and telescope in such a manner 
that the light traverses all of them in succession. 
The separation effected is, of course, in direct pro- 
portion to the number of prisms employed. 

Recently a "diffraction grating" a surface of 
polished silver ruled very closely by a diamond 
with a number of parallel lines has been frequently 



The Analysis of Sunlight. 161 

substituted for the prism. The light from the colli- 
mator falls upon the grating, and is thrown back, 
separated in the act of reflection into its constituent 
colours. A spectrum is thus formed, which is 
examined through a telescope, arranged nearly 
parallel to the collimator, and by the side of it. It 
is not possible to give here the explanation of the 
analysis of light by the diffraction grating, which 
is, however, in perfect accord with the wave theory 
of light. The separation of the colours is propor- 
tional to the closeness of the lines, and gratings 
recently constructed by Professor Rowland of 
Baltimore contain as many as 40,000 lines to the 
inch. The diffraction spectrum possesses certain 
advantages and disadvantages as compared with 
that formed by a prism. 

In 1802 Wollaston detected four shaded lines 
intersecting the spectrum of sunlight at right angles 
to its length. Bearing in mind that the spectrum 
is, in reality, a series of pictures of the slit, one 
being formed by each kind of light present in the 
mixture submitted to analysis, it is clear that the 
shaded bands must indicate colours absent from, 
or feebly represented in, the light; as missing 
colours in sunlight. Three of the four lines 
Wollaston regarded as forming the natural divisions 
between different shades of colour at best a not 
very satisfactory hypothesis, and one shortly to be 
disproved. 

By the refinements introduced by Fraunhofer in 
1814, the number of dark lines in the solar spectrum 
was increased to close upon six hundred, and it 

(M520) L 



1 62 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

may be added that in a fine modern spectroscope 
upwards of ten thousand are visible. By rotating 
the observing telescope until the more conspicuous 
of them were brought in succession to the centre 
of the field of view, Fraunhofer was able, from the 
reading of a graduated circle attached to the tele- 
scope, to measure the positions of the lines in the 
spectrum, or, more definitely, the degree of re- 
frangibility of each missing colour. From these 
measurements he constructed the first map of the 
solar spectrum, denoting the more conspicuous 
lines by the capital letters from A to H. The dark 
lines are still known as the Fraunhofer lines, and 
are identified by Fraunhofer's nomenclature. 

The lines indicated by A and B upon Fraunhofer's 
map are situated in the deep-red of the spectrum, 
and are, under ordinary conditions, both strongly 
marked, c is a sharp well-defined line in the 
region of the spectrum where the red is passing 
into orange; D, a close pair of lines in the yellow; 
E, a condensed group in the bright-green; F, a 
sharply-defined line in the greenish-blue; G, a 
group in the deep-blue ; and H, a rather wide pair 
of broad diffused lines, or rather bands, that lie 
in the extreme violet. This pair have assumed 
great importance in recent researches, and are now 
generally known as H and K. 

For the Fraunhofer lines to appear in the spec- 
trum, the slit must be very narrow. If it is opened 
beyond a certain degree of fineness, the images 
of the slit formed by the colours lying in the spec- 
trum on either side of the position of the colour, 



The Analysis of Sunlight. 163 

to the absence of which the dark line is due, expand 
across its place and mask the effect of its absence. 

Observations of the very impure spectra obtained 
by viewing flames directly through a prism had 
already been made by different observers with 
but little result, but now Fraunhofer subjected 
their light to examination in his more refined 
spectroscope. With no flames were any dark lines 
observed in the spectra, but bright lines frequently 
made their appearance, shining out conspicuously 
upon the background of a continuous spectrum. 
The bright lines clearly pointed to the presence, 
in the light under examination, of strongly devel- 
oped pure colours that were not decomposed by 
the prism. In all flames that were examined, and 
especially strongly represented in the blue base of 
a candle-flame, were two nearly coincident shades 
of yellow, revealed by the appearance in the spec- 
trum of two closely adjacent yellow lines. Fraun- 
hofer remarked with astonishment that these yellow 
lines coincided exactly in their positions in the 
spectrum with the two components of the double 
dark line that he had already distinguished by the 
letter D in the spectrum of the Sun. The two 
shades of yellow, so abnormally abundant in the 
light of a candle, appeared, therefore, to be absent 
from, or, at any rate, but feebly represented in, the 
light of the Sun. 

Later, in 1823, Fraunhofer examined the spectra 
of the brighter stars. In all of them he recognized 
dark lines, but although, in a few instances, the 
spectra appeared to be similar to that of the Sun 



164 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

in the distribution and in the relative intensity 
of the lines, in the greater number they were 
essentially different. The spectrum of Sirius, in 
particular, displayed only three dark lines, but all 
were far broader and more strongly marked than 
any recognized in the spectrum of the Sun. 

For these as well as other reasons, Fraunhofer 
strongly maintained that the dark lines denoted 
colours initially absent in the radiation of the Sun 
and stars themselves, and that they did not originate, 
as had been suggested, either in the atmosphere 
of the Earth, or by some optical effect in the 
spectroscope, similar to that by which dark diffrac- 
tion lines appear when an illuminated slit is viewed 
from some distance through a second slit, a pheno- 
menon that was at that time attracting considerable 
attention. 

The origin of the bright lines in the spectra of 
flames: the source of the dark lines in the spectra of 
the Sun and stars: and the remarkable coincidence 
established by Fraunhofer between the two yellow 
rays emitted by flames and the D pair absent in the 
light of the Sun, aroused the highest interest and 
evoked the keenest inquiry. For many years the 
exact study of the bright lines in flame spectra 
made but little progress. It was found that, upon 
saturating the wick of a flame with different 
chemicals, with the exception of the yellow pair 
that was always present, different sets of bright 
lines appeared in the spectrum. It appeared pro- 
bable that the colours represented by the bright 
lines were emitted by the glowing vapours of the 



The Analysis of Sunlight. 165 

substances introduced into a flame, and that the 
continuous spectrum upon which they appeared was 
due to the normal radiations of the flame itself, for, 
with the scarcely luminous flame of burning alcohol, 
the continuous spectrum nearly disappeared, and 
the bright lines that flashed out upon the introduc- 
tion of various chemicals seemed as if separated 
by intervals of almost complete darkness. The 
demonstration of the now familiar fact that each 
glowing vapour emits definite colours, indicated by 
bright lines occupying definite positions in the 
spectrum, and that from the appearance of its 
spectral lines the presence of an element may be 
inferred with certainty, was, however, only estab- 
lished by the classical researches of Bunsen and 
Kirchhoff in 1859. 

But, in the meantime, facts of great interest were 
brought to light in connection with the dark 
Fraunhofer lines. In 1832 Sir David Brewster 
noticed that as the Sun approached the horizon 
many of the Fraunhofer lines became intensified. 
Several groups of lines towards the red end of the 
spectrum, for instance, while delicately defined 
when the Sun is high, appear at sunrise and sunset 
as massive black columns standing in front of the 
deep-red of the spectrum. Since, when at a low 
altitude, the rays of the Sun penetrate the atmos- 
phere obliquely, and their path included in the air 
is therefore very great, Brewster suggested that 
those lines that were affected in this manner were 
caused by absorption by the Earth's atmosphere of 
the colours corresponding to them ; their intensifica- 



166 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

tion with the low sun being due to increased absorp- 
tion by reason of the greater atmospheric path of 
the light. The truth of this view has since been 
abundantly confirmed, and the lines that thus 
originate are known as telluric lines. The great 
majority of the Fraunhofer lines appeared, however, 
to be independent of the atmospheric track of the 
solar rays, since they were not affected in intensity 
by the altitude of the Sun, and it was therefore 
assumed that they denoted colours absent in sun- 
light before it entered the Earth's atmosphere. 
They were, in consequence, regarded as owing 
their origin to a similar absorption of definite 
colours in an atmosphere that was supposed to 
envelop the incandescent surface of the Sun. 

In the discovery of the origin of the telluric lines, 
the first glimpse was obtained of the remarkable 
power possessed by many gases of absorbing 
colours so definitely as to more or less completely 
extinguish them without affecting those immediately 
on either side of them in the spectrum. In the 
following year Brewster showed that, instead of 
invariably necessitating an extensive atmosphere to 
produce the effect, with some gases a few inches 
were sufficient; for, on causing the light from a 
candle-flame to traverse such small lengths of 
certain gases before entering the slit of the spectro- 
scope, the spectrum became ruled throughout by 
dark lines and shaded bands. Upon introducing a 
glass tube filled with the ruddy vapour of nitric 
peroxide between a lamp-flame and a spectroscope, 
the spectrum instantly became crossed by an 



The Analysis of Sunlight. 167 

enormous number of dark lines, some broad and 
massive, and others most delicately fine. Each 
dark line denoted the absence of a definite colour 
that had been absorbed by the vapour. Some of 
the lines appeared to coincide in their positions in 
the spectrum with certain of the Fraunhofer lines 
in the spectrum of the Sun, from which Brewster 
was led to conclude that nitric peroxide was a con- 
stituent of the Sun's atmosphere. Although this 
conclusion has been disproved, in suggesting it 
Brewster obtained the first glimpse of one of the 
mo^t powerful and remarkable of the methods ot 
modern scientific analysis. 

The years that immediately followed Brewster's 
observations marked the birth of the science of 
photography. In 1838 Daguerre had discovered 
the process, with which his name has been since 
associated, for causing objects, by means of their 
light radiations, to impress their pictures upon 
specially prepared silver surfaces; in 1840 Dr. 
Draper had effected the first application of the dis- 
covery to astronomy in photographing the Moon ; 
and two years later Becquerel succeeded in obtain- 
ing a photograph of the solar spectrum by project- 
ing it upon a sensitive plate. In this first photo- 
graph of the spectrum the dark lines appeared as 
surely as in eye observation, while the remarkable 
fact became apparent, that the spectrum did not 
terminate with the violet, but extended beyond it 
to a distance far exceeding its visible limits, con- 
tinuing, in its invisible extension, to be crossed by 
lines of absent radiation. It appeared, therefore, 



168 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

that the total radiation of the Sun contains rays 
more refrangible than violet light, and which do 
not possess the power of exciting the sense of 
vision. A year later, Draper, also by the aid of 
photography, similarly traced the solar spectrum 
beyond its visible limit in the red, and there also 
found Fraunhofer lines of absent radiation. 

The time was now approaching when a successful 
attack was to be made upon the great mystery of 
the Fraunhofer lines. In 1849 M. Leon Foucault 
devised an experiment with the view of determining 
whether or not the coincidence as regards position 
in the spectrum between the two components of 
the Fraunhofer D line and the remarkable close 
pair of yellow lines that appeared in the spectrum 
of almost every flame, was exact. In this experi- 
ment, which has become classical, the yellow pair 
were obtained from the light of the electric arc. 
The electric arc is formed by passing a current of 
electricity across the space separating the ends of 
two carbon rods that are almost in contact. In 
passing through the rods the current experiences 
but little resistance, and therefore develops but 
little heat; but in its passage from one rod to the 
other across the air-gap separating them enormous 
heat is developed owing to the greatly increased 
resistance, and the air is raised to a very high 
temperature. The intensely hot bridge of air be- 
tween the ends of the rods is technically known as 
the " arc ". The temperature of the arc is so high 
that impurities present in the carbon rods, and 
indeed the carbon itself, volatilize and mix, in the 



The Analysis of Sunlight. 169 

state of gas, with the air in the gap. In spite of its 
high temperature, the arc itself gives but little 
light, owing to the poor radiating power of the 
gases forming it; but the ends of the rods, bathed 
in these highly-heated gases, are raised to the 
vivid state of incandescence that is the source 
of light in the arc lamp. The electric arc had 
been discovered by Sir Humphry Davy in the year 
1800. 

On directing the spectroscope toward either of 
the incandescent carbon ends, Foucault observed 
that the light agreed with that radiated by all in- 
candescent solid bodies in yielding a continuous 
spectrum, but on deflecting the spectroscope towards 
the gap, so that the light from the glowing gases 
should be subjected to analysis, a number of separ- 
ated bright lines were seen, indicating the existence, 
in the radiations of the glowing gases of the arc, of 
a corresponding number of isolated colours. Among 
the lines so seen the familiar yellow pair shone out 
conspicuously. To test whether these coincided 
exactly in their spectral position with the components 
of the D line in the solar spectrum, Foucault con- 
densed the rays from the Sun upon the arc by means 
of an ordinary condensing lens. The solar rays, 
after traversing the arc, streamed onward, and 
entered the slit of the spectroscope along with the 
rays of the arc itself, and Foucault, anticipating 
that the coincidence between the positions of the 
yellow lines and the D lines would prove to be 
exact, confidently expected that, in the light of the 
Sun, poor in definite yellow rays, supplemented by 



170 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

that of the arc, abnormally rich in them, the D lines 
would altogether disappear. 

On observing the spectrum, however, Foucault 
witnessed a most remarkable and unexpected appear- 
ance. Not only were the dark D lines not filled in 
by the yellow lines of arc spectrum, but they appeared 
to be both darker and wider than when the arc was 
absent. Not only did the radiations of the arc fail 
to supplement the deficiency of the similar radiations 
in sunlight, but the deficiency at once became more 
pronounced than before. Only one explanation 
appeared possible. Not only were the gases of the 
arc capable of radiating two definite shades of yel- 
low, but they also possessed the power of absorbing 
them. The gases of the arc had absorbed a greater 
quantity of the yellow rays from the solar radiation 
than they had added to it, and increased darkness 
had been the result. Further, excluding the Sun 
altogether, Foucault, by the aid of a mirror, re- 
flected the light from one of the incandescent carbon 
points through the gases occupying the gap be- 
tween the pair; and on submitting the light thus 
transmitted to analysis, observed a continuous spec- 
trum crossed by a pair of fine dark lines in the 
yellow. The arc had again absorbed the two 
shades of yellow more abundantly than it had 
radiated them, and the D lines had been produced 
for the first time in a laboratory experiment. 

There can be little doubt that if the origin of the 
yellow pair had been known, the problem of the 
Fraunhofer lines would have found its solution in 
Foucault's experiments. The yellow lines had, 



The Analysis of Sunlight. 171 

however, proved a veritable stumbling-block to the 
advance of spectrum analysis. In the greater num- 
ber of cases it seemed probable that the appearance 
of definite bright lines in spectra depended upon 
the presence of definite glowing vapours in the 
source of light, but the yellow pair seemed to defy 
any such limitation. They flashed out in the 
spectra of all flames, they seemed to be associated 
with the burning of all substances; and it was 
indeed suggested that they were developed in, and 
inseparably connected with, the process of com- 
bustion. For a few years after Foucault's obser- 
vations they succeeded in evading the most refined 
methods of scientific inquiry. By the year 1852, 
however, Sir Gabriel Stokes had shown that they 
were absent from the spectrum of a candle-flame 
when the wick had been carefully snuffed clean and 
so as not to project into the luminous envelope, as 
well as from the spectrum of the flame of pure 
alcohol when burned in a carefully-cleaned watch- 
glass. On the other hand, they were most intensely 
developed when common salt the chloride of so- 
dium and other compounds of sodium were intro- 
duced into flames. Gradually it became more and 
more probable that they were due to the glowing 
vapour of sodium, and that their almost universal 
appearance in spectra arose from the extreme diffi- 
culty of excluding a last trace of salt, and from their 
very powerful development upon the presence of 
the smallest possible quantity of it. Assuming 
this to be the explanation of their appearance, Sir 
Gabriel Stokes, in 1852, gave the correct explan- 



172 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

ation of the appearance of the D lines in the spectrum 
of the Sun. 

Sir Gabriel Stokes's explanation was based upon 
theoretical grounds the wave theory of light, and 
the view of the structure of matter involved in its 
acceptance. Since, in its later history, the most 
important applications of the analysis of light to 
astronomy have been directly due to the view of 
the nature of light indicated in the wave theory, it 
may be well to make a slight digression in a short 
sketch of its general features. 

According to the wave theory of light originally 
enunciated by Christian Huygens in the latter part 
of the seventeenth century, suppressed for a time 
by the overpowering authority of Sir Isaac Newton, 
but placed upon a sound scientific foundation early 
in the present century by the labours of Dr. Thomas 
Young light is due to the transmission of waves, 
or undulations, from a luminous body to the eye. 
For there to be undulations there must be some- 
thing to undulate, and to this something the name 
has been given of the "ether". To account for 
the phenomena of light, it is necessary to regard 
the ether, as not only existing throughout space, at 
any rate to the farthest of the visible stars, but as 
permeating all matter. 

The display of iridescent colour frequently so 
exquisitely developed in light reflected from thin 
films, such as the envelope of a soap-bubble; the 
coloured fringes visible upon either side of an 
illuminated slit when viewed through a second and 
similar slit at a moderate distance from it; and the 



The Analysis of Sunlight. 173 

spectrum formed by a diffraction grating, enable 
us, if we interpret them according to the wave 
theory by which alone they have so far received 
a satisfactory explanation to measure the lengths 
of the ether waves. Estimates deduced from the 
different phenomena are in perfect accord, though 
there is no doubt that the highest degree of accuracy 
is obtainable in observations of the diffraction spec- 
trum. From them it appears that colour, and there- 
fore refrangibility, is determined by the length of 
waves in free ether; the sensation of red being 
excited by the longest and that of violet by the 
shortest waves that affect the eye, while the pass- 
age up the spectrum from red to violet is accom- 
panied by a continual decrease of wave-length. 
The actual wave-lengths are about a sixty-thou- 
sandth of an inch for violet, and a thirty-thousandth 
of an inch for red light, but they are more accu- 
rately given in the table on p. 175. 

It will scarcely be necessary to remind the reader 
that the appearance of the transmission of matter by 
wave motion is illusory. On the surface of water 
disturbed by wave motion floating objects merely 
rise and fall as the waves pass, which shows that 
the movement of the wave-conveying medium con- 
sists of a succession of oscillations up and down, 
while the waves themselves continually pass them 
horizontally. The illusion of water moving witn 
waves results from each portion of the surface trans- 
mitting its disturbance to the portion immediately 
in front of it, but occupying a definite interval of 
time in so doing. After a short interval, therefore, 



174 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

the form of the water surface has been moved for- 
ward, but so continuously that the appearance is 
produced of the surface itself having been displaced 
in the direction of the wave motion. 

The double appearance of objects when viewed 
through Iceland spar and other crystals, as well as 
the chromatic effects and general properties of 
polarized light, indicate that the motion of the ulti- 
mate parts of the wave-conveying ether is transverse, 
or across the direction of wave motion. In this 
respect ether waves resemble waves upon the sur- 
face of water, as well as those upon stretched 
strings. They differ in character from waves of 
sound, in that in these the motion of the air the 
undulating medium in their case consists of oscil- 
lations to and fro in the direction of wave motion. 

During the passage of a single wave past a point 
in the ether, the ether at the point executes a single 
vibration or oscillation about its normal position, 
this vibration being, according to the inference of 
the preceding paragraph, across the direction of 
wave motion. During the passage of a train, or 
series, of similar waves, the ether, therefore, con- 
tinues to oscillate, and the number of oscillations 
executed every second a quantity known as the 
"frequency of oscillation" is determined by, and 
is equal to, the number of waves passing in a 
second. Since all waves travel with the same speed, 
the longer will pass in less rapid succession than 
the shorter, and will therefore produce a less rapid 
oscillation. The violet waves, for instance, being 
only about half as long as the red, are associated 



The Analysis of Sunlight. 



175 



with double the frequency of oscillation. From the 
geometry of wave motion thus sketched it follows 
from simple reasoning that in every case the velocity 
of the waves is equal to the product of their length 
into the frequency of oscillation. From this rela- 
tion it is possible to determine the frequency of 
oscillation of different kinds of light waves, since 
their velocity the speed of light is known, and 
their length may be determined in every case by a 
diffraction grating. This has been carried out in 
the following table, the speed of light being taken 
as 187,000 miles per second. The way in which 
the frequency of oscillation increases as the wave- 
length decreases should be carefully noticed. 

WAVE-LENGTHS AND FREQUENCIES OF OSCILLATION OF 
ETHER WAVES. 



Colour. 


Fraunhofer 
Line. 


Wave-length 
in free ether, 1 
in millionth* 
of an inch. 


Vibrations per 
second in 
millions of 
millions. 


Red 


A 


29-9 


395'8 


Orange 
Yellow 
Green 


6 
C 

D 

E 


27-0 
25 '9 
23-2 
207 


437 
458 
5io 
57 


Blue 


F 


19-1 


618 


Violet 


G 
H 


I73 
15-6 


683 
757 



1 The necessity for the addition of the words "in free ether" is due to the 
fact that, while traversing transparent substances, the speed of light is 
reduced, doubtless as the result of the close association of the ether with 
ordinary matter. The frequency of oscillation must, however, remain the 
same, being always that of the source of the waves, so that the relation 
speed of waves = wave-length x frequency indicates that the wave-length 
must be reduced in proportion to the speed. It is customary to define a 
particular kind of light by its wave-length. Since, however, this varies with 
the medium through which the light travels, it would be far better to define 



176 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

The most simple view to take with reference to 
the generation of waves in the ether, is that the 
luminous or wave-generating body contains os- 
cillating portions of matter that possess a grip 
upon the ether. As the oscillations of a hand or 
tuning-fork may develop waves upon a stretched 
cord, so these vibrating parts, gripping the ether, 
and being thus able to transmit their movement to 
those portions of it immediately round them, set up 
waves, the frequency of oscillation of which is the 
same as their own. What these oscillating parts 
are is not of fundamental importance to the present 
study, but they are generally regarded either as the 
atoms of matter, or as portions of, or structures in, 
the atoms, elastically attached and capable of oscil- 
lation within them. The atom of sodium, capable 
of emitting two yellow rays of nearly the same tint, 
that is, of developing two series of waves of nearly 
the same frequency, may be regarded as analogous 
to a musical instrument with only two strings tuned 
nearly to unison. Since the waves generated by 
the incandescent vapour of sodium cause the ether 
to oscillate about 510 millions of millions of times 
in a second, this rate of vibration must also be that 
of the structures themselves. Below the tempera- 
ture at which the yellow light is emitted we must 
suppose that the structures are not oscillating with 

it by its frequency of oscillation. When light is denned by its wave-length, 
that in free ether should always be understood. In glass the speed of light 
is about % of its speed in free ether. In air it is scarcely affected. Re- 
fraction is the direct result of alteration of speed in passing from one 
medium into another, and from the extent of refraction the alteration in 
speed, and therefore in wave-length, can be determined. 



The Analysis of Sunlight. 177 

this frequency, but that the oscillations may be 
developed by sufficient addition of heat. The 
higher the temperature, the more intense the radia- 
tions, and therefore the more intense the oscilla- 
tions of the structures. The reader is probably 
aware that there is good reason for regarding such 
atomic and molecular vibration as constituting the 
sensible heat of matter. 

Adopting this view as representing the mechan- 
ism of radiation, that of absorption follows naturally. 
Upon a series of ether waves traversing a space 
throughout which atoms of matter are distributed, 
the atomic structures gripping, and therefore 
gripped by, the ether, will tend to be thrown to 
and fro in harmony with its movement. Heat will 
be represented by the motion generated in the 
atoms, while the energy of the waves themselves 
will be correspondingly decreased by the loss of the 
motion transferred from them to the matter. 

There is, however, one case in which the trans- 
ference of the energy of motion from the ether 
waves to the atoms will be especially pronounced. 
It is a familiar fact, deducible from the first prin- 
ciples of mechanics, that, if a body capable of 
independent vibration is acted upon by a succes- 
sion of impulses acting in unison with its own 
oscillations, a far more extensive oscillation will 
result than if such a coincidence did not exist. The 
principle, generally known as that of sympathetic 
vibration or resonance, is abundantly illustrated 
throughout mechanics and physics. If a weight 
be suspended by a cord, the upper end of which is 

(M620) M 



178 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

held in the hand, a succession of properly timed, 
but scarcely appreciable, movements of the hand to 
and fro may cause a very extensive oscillation of 
the weight. If a large man be seated in a garden 
swing, a little man, by properly timing his thrusts 
into unison with the oscillations of the swing, may 
develop in the large man an oscillation out of all 
proportion to that which would otherwise result 
from his most violent efforts. A musical note 
sounded in the neighbourhood of a jar of such 
dimensions that the natural period of oscillation of 
the contained air coincides with that of the note, 
will cause the air of the jar to sound loudly in 
response. The recently discovered possibility of 
electric signalling over considerable distances with- 
out connecting wires depends upon the coincidence 
between a succession of feeble electric impulses 
applied to a distant conductor, and the normal 
oscillations of electricity in the conductor. 

If, now, white light that is, a number of wave- 
trains of all possible frequencies between the limits 
of the spectrum should traverse the vapour of 
sodium, it should not be difficult to predict what 
would occur. Those waves, the frequencies of 
which did not agree with the natural vibrations of 
the sodium atoms, would scarcely affect them, 
and therefore they themselves would be scarcely 
affected. Those waves, however, that possessed 
vibration frequencies in unison with the normal 
oscillations of the atoms, would apply impulses to 
the atoms or atomic structures accurately timed to 
their own oscillations; resonance would follow, and 



The Analysis of Sunlight. 179 

extensive motion would be developed in the atoms. 
During the development of this motion, equal 
energy of motion would be absorbed from the 
waves. The waves, from which this energy would 
be absorbed, would be damped, and the light, after 
having traversed the vapour, would be found defi- 
cient in precisely those waves that the vapour itself 
could originate. Generally any vapour possessing 
the power of emitting definite radiations must also 
possess a special capacity for absorbing them. 

The deficiency in sunlight of the two shades of 
yellow emitted by the glowing vapour of sodium, 
indicates, therefore, that the white light of the Sun 
has traversed the vapour of sodium somewhere in 
its passage to the surface of the Earth. Since the 
vapour of sodium is not found in the atmosphere of 
the Earth, and is assuredly not distributed in inter- 
planetary space, it must be looked for in the atmos- 
phere of the Sun. 

Such was Sir Gabriel Stokes's explanation of the 
double line D, and of other Fraunhofer lines, though 
up to that time no other coincidence between Fraun- 
hofer lines and bright lines in the spectra of glowing 
terrestrial vapours has been established. With the 
singular modesty and reticence that has character- 
ized him through life, Stokes, while offering one of 
the most remarkable of scientific theories as a sug- 
gestion in private conversation with a friend, re- 
frained from making it public. In the following 
year (1853), however, a similar explanation was 
given by Angstrom of Upsala. Angstrom, more- 
over, established the coincidence between other of the 



i8o Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

Fraunhofer lines and certain bright lines, though of 
unknown origin, in the spectrum of the electric arc. 
In 1859 the publication of the classical researches 
of Bunsen and Kirchhoff placed spectrum analysis 
upon a sound foundation as a branch of science. 
For the first time, bright lines in the spectra of 
flames were definitely proved to arise from the 
presence of glowing vapours in the flames. The 
flame generally employed was that of a spirit-lamp, 
or of gas which had been deprived of its luminosity 
in the now familiar form of Bunsen burner. A 
great number of different substances were made to 
pass into the flame in the state of vapour, by intro- 
ducing them in the solid or liquid state upon a 
piece of platinum wire into the lower part of the 
flame. It was found that every system of bright 
lines was associated with the presence of a definite 
vapour in the flame, and with such consistency 
that the presence of the vapour could be inferred 
with certainty from the appearance of its character- 
istic lines in the spectrum. This fact, of course, 
constitutes the very foundation of spectrum analysis. 
The famous close yellow pair were traced to sodium; 
and it was shown that their continual appearance 
in all sorts and conditions of flames was due to the 
universal distribution of common salt in the atmos- 
phere, carried into it in all probability in the first 
instance by sea spray, and to the marvellous de- 
licacy of the spectral test, a delicacy so extreme 
that the yellow lines appeared in the spectrum on 
the introduction of a two-hundred-millionth part of 
a grain of salt into the flame. 



The Analysis of Sunlight. 181 

Not only was the complete set of bright lines 
yielded by one glowing vapour different from that 
given by any other, but only rarely did any one of 
the lines of one element appear to occupy in the 
spectrum the position of a line of another. Whether 
the few coincidences that have to the present time 
been observed are in any case more than approxi- 
mate, the result of insufficient spectroscopic power; 
whether they are exact; and, if so, whether they are 
more than accidental, has been very keenly dis- 
cussed in recent years in connection with certain 
modern speculations. In a great many instances 
apparent coincidences have been shown, by the 
application of more refined instrumental means, to 
be only approximate, and the view is now generally 
held that the few as yet unresolved will either yield 
to higher dispersion or are merely accidental. 

In 1859 the splendid results obtained by Bunsen 
and Kirchhoff were brought to bear upon the 
problem of the Fraunhofer lines by Kirchhoff. 
Kirchhoff found no difficulty in obtaining the 
sodium lines dark upon the background of a con- 
tinuous spectrum, by interposing the flame of a 
spirit-lamp, upon the wick of which a few grains 
of salt had been sprinkled, in the path of rays pro- 
ceeding from the incandescent lime of the lime- 
light to the slit of a spectroscope. Further, he 
failed to obtain the effect when the flame of a 
bunsen burner similarly charged with salt was used 
instead of the spirit-lamp, but perceived instead the 
bright-yellow pair radiated by the flame superposed 
upon the less brilliant continuous spectrum of the 



182 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

lime-light. From this he suspected that to effect 
"reversal" the temperature of the vapour must be 
less than that of the radiating source. 

The statement of the exact conditions under which 
a vapour will effect the reversal of its spectral lines 
was first given by Balfour Stewart in 1861. In 1791 
Prevost of Geneva had published a suggestive paper 
entitled " On the Equilibrium of Heat", in which, 
according to a law then enunciated for the first time, 
and since known as "the law of exchanges ", it was 
shown that every body when at the same tempera- 
ture as those surrounding it, must possess a power 
of absorbing heat radiations in direct proportion to 
its power of emitting them. At the time of Kirch- 
hoffs researches, it was thought to be probable, 
from the similarity in the laws by which they were 
governed, that radiant heat and light were different 
forms of one kind of radiation, and Balfour Stewart 
perceived that the extension of Prevost's reasoning 
to light radiation would account, not only for the 
fact of reversal, but also for the condition, already 
suggested by experiment, that to effect it, the ab- 
sorbing vapour must be cooler than the source. 

Limits of space, unfortunately, make it impossible 
to introduce Balfour Stewart's reasoning here, but 
an excellent outline is given in Balfour Stewart's 
Heat, and will well repay the most careful study. 
By a very simple process of reasoning, based upon 
the obviously sound assumption that a body within 
an opaque enclosure, all portions of the inner sur- 
face of which are at the same constant temperature, 
will ultimately acquire the temperature of the en- 



The Analysis of Sunlight. 183 

closure, Balfour Stewart showed that such a body, 
when at the temperature of the enclosure, must ab- 
sorb and emit any particular kind of radiation in 
exactly equal amount. Since the rate of radiation 
from a surface is directly dependent upon tempera- 
ture, while the rate of absorption depends upon the 
nature of the surface and is not directly affected by 
its temperature, it follows that, under the conditions 
imagined, any fall in the temperature of the body 
will cause its radiation to fall short of its absorption, 
while a rise in temperature will cause its radiation 
to exceed the absorption. 

From this conclusion it is possible to state defi- 
nitely an essential condition for the appearance of 
dark lines in the spectrum of the Sun. It is, that 
the gases present in the solar atmosphere must be 
at a lower temperature than the incandescent sur- 
face or photosphere behind. If the temperature 
of the gases were equal to that of the photosphere, 
they would be in such a condition as to absorb from 
its light precisely as much of any kind of radiation 
as they would add to it, and, in consequence, the 
light from the photosphere would, after traversing 
them, be unchanged in composition. If the tem- 
perature of the atmosphere were to fall below that 
of the photosphere, the radiation of its gases would, 
for each particular kind of ray, fall short of the 
absorption, and dark lines would result in the 
spectrum; while, if the temperature of the atmo- 
sphere were to rise above that of the photosphere, 
the radiation of its gases would exceed the absorp- 
tion exercised by them, and bright lines would 



184 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

appear upon the continuous spectrum of the photo- 
sphere. From the general appearance of dark lines, 
the Sun's atmosphere may be assumed to be cooler 
than the photosphere, though, as will be seen later, 
bright lines do occasionally appear. 

It is clear from these principles that the Fraun- 
hofer lines are not absolutely dark, but only appear 
so by contrast with the more brilliant spectrum of 
the photosphere upon which they are projected. 
Even if a gaseous constituent of the solar atmo- 
sphere were a perfect absorber of particular kinds of 
light, its own radiation, which would be of the same 
nature as the absorbed light, would travel on with 
the photospheric rays that had escaped, and would 
in part supply the place of those that had been ab- 
sorbed. There is no doubt, that if the incandescent 
surface of the Sun were for a moment to be extin- 
guished, while its atmosphere remained unaffected, 
the solar spectrum would appear as a crowd of 
bright lines corresponding to actually existing dark 
ones. Tb-e- 'existence of the photosphere behind 
doesjaot detract from the light that we receive from 
atmosphere, but, by filling the spaces between 
its bright lines with more intense light, causes them 
to appear dark by contrast. That the apparently 
dark Fraunhofer lines are in reality brilliant can be 
shown by carefully-arranged experiments. 

The presence of sodium in the atmosphere of the 
Sun having been established, Kirchhoff next en- 
deavoured to discover other of its constituents, by 
searching in the spectra of terrestrial elements for 
bright lines that should coincide in their positions 



doesnot 
^^jffatmo 



The Analysis of Sunlight. 185 

with Fraunhofer lines. His efforts were entirely 
successful. On passing the intense electric dis- 
charge of an induction coil from one metal wire to 
another across a short air gap, a brilliant spark was 
obtained, which, when analysed, gave a spectrum 
of bright lines clearly due to the glowing gases 
filling the gap. Different sets of bright lines ap- 
peared as different metals were employed to form 
the spark, and it was clear that the spectrum con- 
sisted of the bright lines given by incandescent air, 
together with those due to the glowing vapours of 
the metal wires, these being partially volatilized by 
the intense heat of the discharge. Passing the dis- 
charge between the ends of iron wires, the spectrum 
given was that of a mixture of the vapour of iron 
and air, and Kirchhoff succeeded in establishing 
coincidences between no fewer than sixty of the 
lines that were due to the iron and dark lines in the 
spectrum of the Sun. It was, therefore, proved that 
the vapour of iron was a constituent of the atmos- 
phere of the Sun. 

Continuing his researches by this method, Kirch- 
hoff considered that he had demonstrated the exist- 
ence in the atmosphere of the Sun of nine metals 
known to terrestrial chemistry. They were sodium, 
iron, calcium, magnesium, nickel, barium, copper, 
zinc, and chromium. Further, it was regarded as 
demonstrated, from the absence of their charac- 
teristic lines, that twelve other metals, including 
gold, silver, and mercury, were absent. 

In 1862 Angstrom published the results of an 
extensive series of observations, similar in principle 



186 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

to those of Kirchhoff, on the chemistry of the Sun's 
atmosphere. Experimental details differed from 
those adopted by Kirchhoff in that the analysis of 
the light was effected by the diffraction grating, 
and in the substitution of the electric arc for the 
discharge of an induction-coil as the source of heat. 
The results were in general agreement with those 
of Kirchhoff, but a few additional elements were 
detected, among which the most interesting was 
hydrogen. The spectrum of hydrogen is of the 
highest importance in the astronomical applications 
of light analysis. When enclosed within a glass 
tube, under a pressure considerably less than that 
of the atmosphere, and subjected to a discharge ot 
electricity generally led into and from the gas by 
platinum wires penetrating the glass hydrogen 
gas becomes luminous, emitting a soft peach-like 
glow. In 1859, Plucker, subjecting this glow to 
analysis in the spectroscope, had found that it con- 
sisted in the main of three bright colours, repre- 
sented in the spectrum by three bright lines the 
first of a magnificent crimson, the second of a 
bluish-green, and the third of a deep-blue colour. 
Angstrom found that each one of these had its 
counterpart among the Fraunhofer lines, and in 
1866 he detected a fourth line of a violet colour 
in the hydrogen spectrum, and found that it also 
was represented by a dark line in that of the Sun. 
The important lines c and F in Fraunhofer's nomen- 
clature are the reversals of the crimson and bluish- 
green lines of hydrogen. 

It is unnecessary to give more than the briefest 



The Analysis of Sunlight. 187 

outline of the later history of these methods. In 
1872 Sir Norman Lockyer commenced a laborious 
series of comparisons of photographs of the solar 
spectrum with those of spectra of metals volatilized 
and rendered incandescent by the electric discharge 
of an induction-coil, and, as the result, succeeded 
during the following four years in adding about 
twenty new elements to the fourteen that had been 
previously recognized in the atmosphere of the Sun. 
In 1887 Messrs. Trowbridge and Hutchins demon- 
strated the existence in the Sun of the vapour of 
carbon, the first element of a non-metallic nature 
that had been found in its atmosphere; while in 
1891, also from photographic comparisons, silicon 
was detected by Professor Rowland. Some idea 
of the fulness of detail shown in Rowland's photo- 
graphs may be gained from the fact that coinci- 
dences were established in them of upwards of two 
thousand of the Fraunhofer lines and bright lines 
in the spectrum of iron. 

By the series of researches that have been traced, 
culminating in the work of Kirchhoff, spectrum 
analysis was raised into the position of an exact 
science. It appeared to be all-powerful in problems 
to which the application of its methods was possible. 
Every glowing gas was regarded as emitting and 
absorbing definite radiations. By the appearance 
of their radiations in the spectroscope gases could 
be detected with certainty; and it was at first 
not unnaturally concluded that by the absence of 
their radiations from glowing matter their own 
absence could be asserted with equal confidence. 



188 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

Had this anticipation been realized, the determina- 
tion of the presence or absence of any terrestrial 
element or compound in the atmospheres of the 
Sun and stars would have been only a matter of 
careful and sufficiently prolonged observations, and 
the later course of physical astronomy would have 
been strangely different from its actual history. 

From about ten years after the date of Kirchhoff s 
work, it has become increasingly apparent, that, 
although in every case the presence of a glowing 
gas is directly demonstrated by the appearance of its 
characteristic radiations, some caution is necessary 
before the absence of the gas can be inferred with 
equal certainty from the absence of those of its radia- 
tions with which we are familiar. It has been found 
that change of physical condition, change that may 
result from alteration of temperature or pressure, or 
even from the admixture of other substances, may 
cause the familiar radiations of a gas to disappear 
and to be replaced by others, frequently to such an 
extent that its spectrum may assume an entirely 
new and unfamiliar character, in which no relation 
to its former self is apparent. Of the many instances 
of such modifications of spectra that have been 
studied, attention may be specially directed to two, 
both of great importance in astronomical physics. 

We have seen that the visible spectrum of hydro- 
gen consists in the main of three bright lines a 
crimson, a green, and a blue while there is a deeper 
violet fourth that appears under strong electrical 
excitement. Of these, the crimson is the one that 
appeals most strongly to the eye. In 1869 Sir 



The Analysis of Sunlight. 189 

Edward Frankland and Sir Norman Lockyer made 
some remarkable observations upon these lines and 
those of nitrogen. Hydrogen gas was first enclosed 
in a glass tube through which an electric current 
was transmitted, and was then rarefied by the action 
of an air-pump connected with the tube. The gas 
within the tube became incandescent under the in- 
fluence of the current, and as rarefaction proceeded, 
the lines of its spectrum became finer and more 
brilliant, and after a time a limit was reached at 
which the first three were most conspicuous. The 
gas was then subjected to a further rarefaction while 
the electric discharge was maintained at a moderate 
intensity. During the progress of the rarefaction 
the spectrum was carefully observed, and it was 
seen to undergo a striking alteration. The crimson 
and blue lines became fainter, although the green 
line was scarcely affected, while, ultimately, the 
crimson and blue entirely vanished, leaving the 
still strong green line as the sole representative of 
the radiations of hydrogen. The more complicated 
spectrum of nitrogen was, under similar conditions, 
also reduced to a single green line ; and, as might 
perhaps have been expected, a mixture of hydrogen 
and nitrogen under these conditions yielded, when 
traversed by an electric discharge, a spectrum con- 
sisting of the two green lines already observed. 
But, by now moderating the discharge so that the 
temperature of the gases should be reduced, the 
green nitrogen line in its turn disappeared, while 
that due to hydrogen still shone out conspicuously; 
so that, in a mixture known to contain nitrogen, 



190 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

and traversed by a current of electricity sufficient in 
intensity to cause a gas mixed with the nitrogen 
to glow, no trace of nitrogen was recorded in the 
spectrum. 

Changes in the spectrum of calcium are no less 
remarkable or important. Compounds of the metal 
calcium the metallic base of lime when introduced 
into the flame of a bunsen burner by the means 
already described, cause the flame to acquire a brick- 
red tinge. Observation of its spectrum shows this 
light to be composed of rays of different colours, 
conspicuous among which is red represented in the 
spectrum by a broad red band. When introduced 
into the electric arc, the temperature of which is 
considerably higher than that of the bunsen flame, 
the vapour of calcium gives a spectrum in which 
the red band has become much reduced, while a 
strong blue line, invisible in the flame spectrum, has 
appeared, as well as a pair of brilliant violet lines. 
In the spark from the induction-coil, which is pro- 
bably at a still higher temperature, the spectrum 
entirely loses its red ray, the blue becomes fainter, 
while the violet pair are far more strongly developed 
than before. The last spectrum of calcium is, there- 
fore, as different from the first as if two different 
metals had been subjected to examination. Passing 
now to the Sun, we find among the Fraunhofer lines 
the reversed images of the lines of the last the 
spark spectrum : H and K, the great dusky pair lying 
almost at the limit of the violet, corresponding in 
their positions with the two broadened violet lines, 
and a fine dark line to which no special name has 



The Analysis of Sunlight. 191 

been given with the blue line. It is further interest- 
ing to notice that in light condensed from solar pro- 
minences which are generally regarded as hotter 
than the general atmosphere upon the slit of the 
spectroscope (the method by which this is effected 
will be described in a later chapter), the blue line 
has in its turn disappeared, and the strong pair, 
H and K, alone remain as the representatives of 
calcium. 

Sir Norman Lockyer has interpreted the change 
in the spectrum of calcium, as well as similar in- 
stances presented by spectra of other metals, as the 
direct effect of increase in temperature, and main- 
tains that they lend strong support to the view, of 
which he has made himself the champion, that by 
increase of temperature terrestrial elements become 
"dissociated " or resolved into still more elementary 
forms of matter. According to this view the pair of 
violet lines are not radiated by the vapour of calcium, 
but by the vapour of some element contained in cal- 
cium and dissociated from it by the temperature of 
the electric arc and that of the atmosphere of the 
Sun, while the substance emitting the red rays 
displayed in the bunsen burner has been entirely 
decomposed at these temperatures. Similarly, the 
substance, the radiation of which contains the blue 
line, is first dissociated from calcium at the tempera- 
ture of the arc, is partially dissipated in the hotter 
spark, and is entirely destroyed in the still more 
intense heat of the prominences. In 1897, however, 
Sir William Huggins succeeded in effecting the 
same changes in the spectrum of calcium by reduc- 



192 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

ing the density of the vapour, without, as he con- 
fidently believed, the change being accompanied by 
any appreciable increase in temperature, so that it 
appears probable that in the experiments first de- 
scribed the changes appearing on increase of tem- 
perature may have been only indirectly due to that 
cause, the direct influence having been the reduction 
in density consequent upon the expansion of the 
heated vapours. 

Although all of the more conspicuous of the 
Fraunhofer lines have now been connected with 
bright lines in the spectra of terrestrial elements, 
the great majority of the whole are still unidentified. 
It is, of course, possible that many or even all of 
these may yet be found to correspond with the bright 
lines of terrestrial elements if it should become 
possible to produce in the laboratory conditions 
more closely approximating to those that exist in 
the atmosphere of the Sun. The failure to detect 
the faintest trace of absorption by oxygen in the 
solar radiations is very remarkable, in connection 
with the extensive distribution and supreme impor- 
tance of oxygen in the atmosphere and in the crust 
of the Earth. It is true that oxygen is magnificently 
represented among the Fraunhofer lines, the great 
groups A and B being due to it, but there is no doubt 
that these are entirely caused by absorption in the 
atmosphere of the Earth. They become decreasingly 
conspicuous in the solar spectrum as observations 
are made from higher and higher altitudes, and at 
such a rate as to indicate that beyond the farthest 
limits of the atmosphere all trace of them would 



The Analysis of Starlight. 193 

disappear from the radiations of the Sun. It is of 
course still possible that oxygen may exist in the 
Sun's atmosphere under physical conditions so 
differing from those with which we are familiar 
that its spectrum is unrecognizable, or it is conceiv- 
able that it exists dissociated into other and more 
elementary forms of matter, the uninterpreted record 
of which is before us among the many thousands of 
the Fraunhofer lines whose language has still to be 
read. 



Chapter V. 
The Analysis of Starlight. 

In the previous chapter we have traced the suc- 
cession of sure though laborious steps, by which, 
from the decomposition of a beam of sunlight in 
Newton's study, a new science has been constructed, 
that has given us a revelation of the chemistry of a 
body nearly a hundred million miles away across 
apparently empty space, the very suggestion of 
which would have seemed utterly preposterous a 
hundred years ago. That a beam of sunlight, less 
than a thousandth of a square inch in section, should 
contain latent within it the record of the constitution 
of the Sun's atmosphere may well induce hesitation 
in imagining any limit to the powers of scientific 
methods. While, moreover, steadily extending 
astronomical discovery in this direction, the new 
method has been developed with no less astounding 
success along other lines. It was considered advis- 

( M 520 ) Jf 



194 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

able to ignore these for the time, and they will 
form the subject of the present and the following 
chapter. 

We have seen that Fraunhofer in 1814 directed to 
the light of the stars the method that he had already 
applied with such remarkable results to that of the 
Sun ; and that he found their spectra to be crossed, 
like the spectrum of the Sun, by a number of dark 
lines. He found, moreover, that while in some 
cases the dark lines of stellar spectra agreed closely 
with those seen in the spectrum of the Sun, they 
were more often different from them both in their 
positions and their relative intensity. The method 
adopted by Fraunhofer in these investigations was 
a modification of that applied to sunlight, differing 
from it chiefly in that it did not involve the use of 
a slit, and has since been generally followed in all 
cases in which it has not been essential to determine 
with a very high degree of accuracy the absolute 
as contrasted with the relative positions of the dark 
lines. A telescope is directed to the star, and the 
practically parallel rays falling upon the object-glass 
are by it condensed into a point-like image at its 
principal focus. In the ordinary use of the telescope 
these rays, continuing their courses, diverge again 
after meeting at the focal image, and, after travers- 
ing the eye-piece a system of lenses equivalent to 
a magnifying-glass, enter the eye. It is convenient 
to regard the eye as directly observing the image at 
the focus of the object-glass by the aid of the mag- 
nifying eye-piece. If now a prism be placed in the 
path of the rays, either before or after they enter the 



The Analysis of Starlight. 195 

telescope, since different colours are deflected dif 
ferently, the point-like focal image becomes expandeo 
into a line of coloured light. Such a line is, how- 
ever, obviously inconvenient for examination ; but 
by further interposing a " cylindrical lens" a lens 
having for its faces portions of cylindrical instead of 
spherical surfaces anywhere in the path of the rays, 
the line becomes broadened out into a band of de- 
finite width, in which dark lines are clearly visible. 
The line of light necessary for the purpose of an- 
alysis, instead of being obtained by a slit, is formed 
by the extension of the point-like image of the star 
into a line by the cylindrical lens. In Fraunhofer's 
arrangement of apparatus, the rays passed through 
the prism immediately before entering the telescope, 
and the cylindrical lens was so adjusted as to be 
just beyond the special line of light formed at the 
principal focus. 

No observations sufficiently delicate to add any- 
thing material to Fraunhofer's discoveries in rela- 
tion to stellar spectra were made before the 
publication of Kirchhoff's researches into the origin 
of the Fraunhofer lines in the solar spectrum. By 
these researches, the dark lines in the spectrum of 
the Sun were traced beyond doubt to the absorption 
of the colours corresponding to them in a solar 
atmosphere, and there could be little hesitation in 
extending the same principle to the explanation of 
the similar lines in the spectra of stars. The sun- 
like character of the stars, already apparent with 
respect to their total luminosity from the establish- 
ment of the Copernican system, became more 



196 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

intimately confirmed by the evidence revealed in 
the analysis of their light that, like the Sun, their 
glowing photospheres were enveloped in absorbent, 
and therefore cooler, atmospheres. 

Although observations of the spectra of stars had 
been made for a few years previously by Father 
Secchi at Rome, their examination was first attacked 
systematically by Sir William Huggins and Dr. 
Miller about the year 1863. At that time, and even 
at the present, the visual observation of all but the 
most brilliant stellar spectra was a most trying and 
delicate task. The faint light of a star, even when 
collected over the extended area of a large object- 
glass and condensed to its focal point, is immeasur- 
ably feeble when compared with sunlight. It is 
necessary to further enfeeble it; first, by extending 
it into a spectral line, and, secondly, by expanding 
this line into a band; while, from the atmospheric 
unsteadiness, of which the familiar appearance of 
twinkling is a result, the excessively faint and, in 
most cases, barely visible spectrum is, together with 
its delicate system of lines, thrown into a continual 
state of tremor. In spite of such difficulties, how- 
ever, Huggins and Miller succeeded in detecting in 
the spectra of several stars lines corresponding with 
those in the spectrum of the Sun as well as with 
many bright lines in the spectra of glowing vapours 
of terrestrial elements. They also thoroughly con- 
firmed Fraunhofer's observations that in many cases 
the spectra of stars were strikingly different in the 
arrangement and intensity of their dark lines from 
that of the Sun. 



The Analysis of Starlight. 197 

While engaged in these observations, Sir William 
Huggins applied the spectroscope to the investiga- 
tion of the physical condition of the nebulae. We 
have traced in an earlier chapter the development 
of astronomical discovery and thought with refer- 
ence to these cosmic clouds. We have seen that, at 
the time of Sir William Huggins's observation, the 
view was very generally entertained that they were 
stellar systems, the constituent stars being, in the 
great majority of cases, too faint to be individually 
distinguishable, though the great telescope of the 
Earl of Rosse appeared to have recently effected 
the resolution of some of the nobler examples. We 
have also followed the main features of Sir William 
Huggins's discovery. The telescope was directed 
to a small but rather bright nebula in the constella- 
tion of the Dragon. The image of the nebula, 
formed by the condensation of its rays by the object- 
glass, was no longer a point, as with a star, but an 
assemblage of points, one corresponding to each of 
the luminous points of the nebula ; in fact, an image 
of the nebula, such that, if a screen or photographic 
plate had been placed behind the object-glass, at a 
distance from it equal to its focal length, a perfect, 
though excessively faint, picture of the nebula 
would have been formed upon it. As a cylindrical 
lens would not have expanded such an image into 
a line, it was considered expedient to make use of 
the more usual slit. The eye-piece of the telescope 
was removed, and a spectroscope was fitted in its 
place, the length of the collimator lying along the 
main axis of the telescope, while the slit was ad- 



198 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

justed to the position of the principal focus of the 
object-glass. In this position the image of the 
nebula was formed upon the "slit-plate" the pair 
of metal plates, by the separation of which the slit 
was produced. A thin slice of the nebula light thus 
entered the slit, and was subjected to analysis and 
subsequent examination in the ordinary way. 

At a first glance the spectrum of the nebula 
appeared to be entirely monochromatic, its light 
being all condensed in a single green line. Closer 
examination, however, revealed the presence of a far 
fainter line rather higher up the spectrum that is, 
toward the blue as well as a third, exceedingly 
faint, and still higher in the spectrum. The failure 
up to that time to observe a spectrum of isolated 
bright lines otherwise than from the radiations of a 
glowing gas, had caused such a spectrum to be re- 
garded as a crucial test of gaseous constitution a 
conclusion thoroughly supported by all later spectro- 
scopic work and the observation was therefore 
universally accepted as demonstrating the gaseous 
constitution of the nebula. Of the three lines ob- 
served in the spectrum, the third coincided in posi- 
tion with the green line of hydrogen, the persistent 
character of which was so strikingly illustrated by 
Sir Edward Frankland and Sir Norman Lockyer 
five years later ; neither of the other two probably 
correspond with any lines that have been obtained 
in terrestrial experiments, though, at the time, the 
first was thought to occupy the position of a line of 
nitrogen, to which, however, later measurements 
have shown it to be only exceedingly close. 



The Analysis of Starlight. 199 

Of the many nebulae that have been subjected 
to spectroscopic examination since the date of Sir 
William Huggins's first observation, about one- 
half have been found to yield a spectrum of bright 
lines. It may be confidently asserted that the 
incandescent matter of all these is gaseous. With 
a few exceptions, the remainder yield faint continu- 
ous spectra unmarked by any evidence of special 
radiation or absorption, but it is not possible to 
infer from this alone that they are not either partially 
or entirely gaseous. Although a gas alone appears 
to possess the power of giving rise to a spectrum 
of bright lines, yet, under not abnormal conditions, 
its light may yield a continuous spectrum indis- 
tinguishable from that of an incandescent solid or 
liquid body. Excessive pressure and great depth 
of the radiating gas tend to bring about such a 
result, but a continuous spectrum has been obtained 
from a small quantity of oxygen contained in a 
glass tube under considerably less than the at- 
mospheric pressure. It is not at present possible 
to interpret a continuous nebular spectrum. 

The first and brightest of the nebular lines 
detected by Sir William Huggins appears to be 
specially characteristic of bright-line nebulas. In 
every one of their spectra it appears as the brightest 
line of the series, while in many it occurs as the 
sole representative, other lines, though probably 
present, being too faint for detection. In a few 
instances other lines than the three originally seen 
have been observed, nearly thirty having been 
detected by visual and photographic observations 



200 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

in that of the Great Nebula of Orion. Of these, 
hydrogen lines, including the crimson c, and a 
yellow line due to the element helium, the signi- 
ficance of which will be seen later, are the only 
ones that have been reproduced in laboratory 
experiments, so that the chemistry of the nebulas 
has only so far been connected with that of the 
earth through the elements hydrogen and helium. 

In its first application the spectroscope had been 
essentially an instrument of chemical research. In 
its demonstration of the physical condition of 
nebulas it had been brought to bear upon problems 
possessing a physical, as well as a purely chemical, 
interest; but it was now to invade the domain of 
physical science, pure and simple, and with the 
most remarkable and far-reaching results. 

In 1848 Christian Doppler of Prague had directed 
attention to the fact that the apparent pitch of a 
musical note became affected during any variation 
in the distance separating the instrument emitting 
it from the ear. A note appears to rise in pitch 
as the source of sound approaches, and to fall in 
pitch as it recedes from the ear. The effect was 
recognized as a natural consequence of the wave 
transmission of sound, and Doppler showed, that, 
if light were also transmitted by wave motion, it 
should follow from analogous reasoning that the 
colour of an object should be affected by the motion 
of the source, becoming more violet as the object 
approached, and inclining toward red as it receded 
from, the observer. 

It is a well-known fact that the sensation of sound 



The Analysis of Starlight. 201 

is due to the transmission of vibrations from a 
sounding body to the ear through the agency of 
wave motion in the air; and that the pitch of a 
note is the result of the frequency of the vibrations 
the number executed in a second of time a 
doubling of frequency causing a rise in pitch 
recognized by the ear as an octave. At each 
vibration of the sounding body a single wave is 
generated in the immediately surrounding air; the 
wave expands outward in an ever -increasing 
spherical surface as a ripple on the surface of a 
pool unruffled by wind extends in a continually 
expanding circle and, upon arriving at the ear, 
imparts to the auditory apparatus a vibration 
similar to that by which it originated. The vibra- 
tion of the sounding body continuing, waves are 
continually generated, and follow in regular succes- 
sion, so that, under normal conditions, as many 
enter the ear every second as are generated by the 
sounding body. The frequency of the note heard 
is therefore that of the source of sound. If, how- 
ever, the source is approaching the ear, this corre- 
spondence is no longer maintained. The source 
generates waves with the same rapidity as before, 
a single wave being produced by each vibration ; 
but it is important to notice that the speed with 
which the waves travel through the air that is, 
the velocity of sound is the same as when the 
source was at rest, since it may be shown from 
mechanical principles that the velocity of wave 
motion is determined solely by the physical pro- 
perties of the medium in which they exist, and is 



202 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

entirely independent of any motion of the source. 
Since, therefore, the waves are travelling through 
the air with the same speed as when the source 
was at rest, and the source is now following them, 
they will be crowded together, and the length of 
each will be decreased. The waves, being shorter 
than before, and still forming a continuous series 
travelling with the original speed, will enter the 
ear in more rapid succession, the frequency of 
vibration of the auditory apparatus will increase, 
and the note will rise in pitch. From analogous 
reasoning it will be seen without difficulty that a 
recession of the source will result in a diminution 
of frequency of vibration, and consequently in a 
fall of pitch. 

It may be well to give a further and more detailed 
illustration of this very important principle. Let 
us imagine a tuning-fork at rest, and radiating 
waves in the air, each i foot in length waves 
that would correspond to a note about two octaves 
above the middle C of the piano. By the time ten 
vibrations had occurred, and ten waves had conse- 
quently been generated, the first wave would have 
travelled 10 feet from the fork, since the whole 
ten, each a foot in length, would form a continuous 
series. Now imagine the fork to move forward, 
and assume its velocity to be one-fifth that of the 
waves that is, one-fifth the speed of sound and 
under these new conditions imagine the original 
ten vibrations to be repeated. As before, ten 
waves will be generated, each following the last 
in regular succession. At the instant of generation 



The Analysis of Starlight. 203 

of the tenth, the first wave will have reached the 
same point as before, its speed being unaffected 
by the motion of the fork; but, during its progress, 
the fork has been following it with a speed one- 
fifth of its own, so that the distance separating it 
from the fork is four-fifths of its former value. As 
there are the same number of waves lying between 
it and the fork, each must therefore be four-fifths 
as long as originally. The shorter waves, travel- 
ling with the same speed as before, enter the ear 
in more rapid succession, and the frequency of 
vibration is increased to five-fourths of its former 
value. In every case the change in frequency can 
be calculated in this simple manner from the relation 
between the speed of the moving source and that 
of the waves. 

It is quite easy to notice the fall in pitch in the 
note of the whistle of an engine when passing the 
observer at express speed. For a speed of 60 miles 
an hour (88 feet per second), the speed of sound 
being noo feet per second, the reader should find 
little difficulty in showing that the frequency of the 
whistle is raised to i -087 of its normal value while 
approaching, and decreased to -926 of it while 
receding. The relative frequencies of 1*087 an< ^ 
926 correspond to an interval of nearly three semi- 
tones, that from do to la^ in music, and such a change, 
which occurs at the instant that the engine passes 
the observer, can scarcely escape the notice of the 
least musical ear. The change is, of course, still 
more strongly marked when the observer, instead of 
being at rest, is travelling at express speed in the 



204 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

direction opposite to that of the whistling engine. 
The fall in pitch of the bell of a passing bicycle is 
quite appreciable to anyone with a fairly sensitive 
ear, even when at rest by the side of the road. 

It is clear that if light depends upon the trans- 
mission of waves in the ether, similar changes 
must be produced in those waves by the motion 
of the source of light towards or from the observer. 
By a motion of approach, the waves entering the 
eye must be reduced in length; they must arrive 
in more rapid succession, and a colour more inclin- 
ing to violet must result ; while, from a motion of 
recession, the waves must be drawn out; they must 
enter the eye in less rapid succession, and the 
colour must appear lower in the spectral series. 
Such was the prediction of Doppler, and he sug- 
gested that the strongly-marked colours of certain 
stars might originate in their rapid motions. 

At the time of the enunciation of this principle, 
the most serious objection to its suggested applica- 
tion appeared to lie in the excessive speeds with 
which it was necessary to suppose the stars to be 
endued. By the rush of a star towards the Earth, 
the whole series of spectral colours present in its 
radiations were supposed to move up the spectrum, 
so that the light received appeared to be abundantly 
rich in violet and poor in red rays, the intermediate 
colours appearing the same as before, since, as 
each became displaced towards the violet, its place 
would be supplied by the similarly affected rays 
immediately below it. Owing to the high velocity 
of light, it was clear, that, to effect any appreciable 



The Analysis of Starlight. 205 

change of colour by such a process, velocities of 
many thousands of miles per second must be 
imagined among the stars, and there appeared to 
be no warrant for so extravagant an assumption. 

A still more fatal objection to Doppler's theory 
became apparent, when, in the years immediately 
following, the extension of the spectrum into its 
invisible ultra-violet and infra-red regions was 
discovered. From the existence of these invisible 
radiations, it would follow that the colours of the 
visible spectrum of a star should be unchanged 
by its approach or recession. A motion of ap- 
proach would cause the frequency of each radiation 
to increase, and, in consequence, each colour would 
become more violet in hue, and would experience 
greater deviation by the prism. Each colour would, 
therefore, be displaced towards the violet end of 
the spectrum, assuming the previous tint, while 
occupying the former position, of the colour im- 
mediately before it. The lowest red rays would 
move farther into the spectrum, their colour at the 
same time becoming brighter; but the frequency 
of the rays immediately below them, previously 
just too low to excite the sensation of vision, would 
be so increased that they would appear in the 
spectrum just within its lowest limits, and would 
take the place of those deep rays that had been 
displaced upwards. Similarly, the frequency of 
the extreme violet waves would be so increased 
that they would enter the invisible region beyond. 
The colours of the visible spectrum would there- 
fore be the same as when the star was at rest. 



206 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

There is no doubt that the colour of a star is a 
physical fact, initially impressed upon its radiations, 
and that it cannot be explained by any theory of 
optical illusion. 

So far the attempt to apply Doppler's principle 
to physical astronomy had been attended with 
failure; but in 1848 Fizeau indicated a method by 
which it might still be possible to detect by its aid 
evidence of the approach or recession of stars in 
their analysed light. It was suggested that, instead 
of attempting to detect the evidence of motion in 
the entire light of stars, close attention should be 
directed to the exact positions of the dark lines by 
which their spectra were crossed. We have seen 
that a dark line in a spectrum indicates the position 
in it of colour absent from the radiations; and it 
follows that, by a motion of approach of a star, 
since the colours that are just more and just less 
refrangible than the missing one will be equally 
displaced up the spectrum, the gap separating 
them will be similarly displaced ; in other words, 
every dark line in the spectrum of an approaching 
star should be displaced toward the violet of the 
spectrum, while, from analogous reasoning, every 
dark line in the spectrum of a receding star should 
be displaced toward the red. 

After several unsuccessful experiments, Sir 
William Huggins felt justified in announcing in 
1868 that he had succeeded in detecting in the 
spectrum of Sirius such a displacement of one of 
its spectral lines as would result from a motion of 
recession of the star. The selection of Sirius for 



The Analysis of Starlight. 207 

the purpose of the research was due to the great 
intensity of its light, as well as from the strongly- 
marked character and undoubted origin of its 
spectral lines. It has been found, however, more 
recently, that these advantages are seriously dis- 
counted by the grave disadvantage arising from 
the ill-defined character of the lines. The visual 
spectrum of Sirius differs from that of the Sun in 
the extraordinary emphasis of the dark lines of 
hydrogen absorption indeed, under ordinary con- 
ditions these are all that are visible, though, when 
the atmosphere is steady and an instrument of high 
optical quality is employed, a great number of fine 
dark lines, many of them corresponding with 
bright lines in the spectrum of iron, may also be 
distinguished. The dark hydrogen lines in the 
spectrum of Sirius are about six times as broad as 
those in the solar spectrum, and, unlike the latter, 
which are clearly marked and sharply defined, 
those of the star are hazy and pass by insensible 
degrees into the bordering light of the spectrum. 
There is good reason to regard this difference as 
indicating a greater density of the hydrogen in the 
atmosphere of the star; since, while at a low 
density, as in the ordinary vacuum-tube, glowing 
hydrogen gives a spectrum consisting of bright 
lines that resemble the dark lines in the spectrum 
of the Sun in being fine and sharp, with increased 
density of the gas the lines become broad and 
badly defined at their edges; and when the gas is 
under a pressure approaching, though still distinctly 
below, that of the atmosphere, its bright lines very 



208 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

closely resemble in their definition the dark lines of 
the Sirian spectrum. 

To determine whether a dark line in the spectrum 
of a star coincides exactly with a corresponding 
bright line in the spectrum of an incandescent 
terrestrial vapour, it is absolutely necessary that 
both should appear in the field of view at the same 
time, and this condition necessitates the rejection of 
the more convenient cylindrical lens in favour of 
the slit. In Huggins's experiment the spectro- 
scope was so adjusted that the slit was very near 
but not coincident with the principal focus of the 
object-glass of a telescope of 8 inches of aperture, 
so that a small length of it became illuminated by 
the nearly condensed rays of the star, and a spec- 
trum of a corresponding width was produced. At 
the same time, rarefied hydrogen, contained in a 
glass tube placed just beyond the object-glass, was 
made to glow by the electric discharge from an in- 
duction-coil. Under these conditions the narrow 
spectrum of the star became visible, while extending 
right across it were the bright lines of the glowing 
hydrogen. Attention was specially directed to the 
most conspicuous of the dark lines that in the 
green part of the spectrum, the far more delicate 
bright-green line of the glowing gas appearing to 
traverse it in the direction of its length. The most 
careful observations of the lines were made many 
times, and Huggins felt confident that the bright 
line, though it appeared projected upon the dark 
one, did not lie along the middle of it, but was 
placed rather lower down toward the red of the 



The Analysis of Starlight. 209 

spectrum. Since, however, it was quite conceivable 
that expansion of the dark line in the spectrum of 
the star, presumably due to increased density of the 
absorbing gas, might not have taken place equally 
upon both sides, the observation was not quite 
conclusive, but Huggins carefully examined the 
spectrum of glowing hydrogen at varying densities, 
and found that the broadening accompanying 
increase of density was in every case entirely 
symmetrical upon either side. The want of co- 
incidence between the centres of the lines was 
therefore confidently attributed to motion in the 
line of sight, and, from its extent, after allowing for 
the motion of the Earth in its orbit at the time, 
Huggins estimated that the star was receding from 
the Sun at the rate of 29^ miles per second. 

In the following year Huggins extended his 
observations to other stars, and was successful in 
detecting displacements of spectral lines in thirty 
instances. With some stars, such as Rigel and 
Castor, the hydrogen lines were displaced towards 
the red end of the spectrum, an indication of reces- 
sion ; with others, including Arcturus and Vega, 
they were raised towards the violet, and denoted 
approach. Further, with the view of confirming 
beyond doubt both the soundness of the principle 
and the possibility of its practical application, the 
spectrum of Venus was observed at times when, 
from the position of the planet in its orbit, its 
motion was known to be directed towards and away 
from the Earth. Since the light of Venus is re- 
flected sunlight, the ordinary Fraunhofer lines are 

(M520) O 



210 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

represented in its spectrum, but a careful examina- 
tion of the selected hydrogen lines showed, as had 
been confidently anticipated, displacements from 
the positions of the lines of terrestrial hydrogen, 
and precisely such displacements as were demanded 
by theory from the speed of the planet relatively to 
that of light. 

The approach or recession of an object is known 
technically as its motion in the line of sight. It is 
clearly but one component of the whole movement, 
the other being a drift at right angles to or athwart 
the line of sight, and the determination of the com- 
plete motion demands a knowledge of both of the 
components. Motion of a star across the line of 
sight is indicated in its so-called " proper motion ", 
or apparent rapidity of drift across the face of the 
sky, but, since the apparent drift represented by a 
given velocity obviously depends inversely upon 
the distance of the star, it is essential to know the 
distance before translating proper motion into 
definite velocity. Our present knowledge of the 
distances of stars is so imperfect that only in a very 
few instances is it possible to make the application 
with any approach to accuracy, but in a few in- 
stances some rough approximation has probably 
been possible. The unique power of the spectro- 
scopic method of determining motion lies in the fact 
that the exact interpretation of its record is entirely 
independent of the distance of a star, the same 
displacement of spectral lines resulting from a 
definite movement in the line of sight, whether the 
luminous body is a member of the Solar System, 



The Analysis of Starlight. 211 

or whether it lies at the extreme limits of fathomable 
space. 

There can assuredly be but little hesitation in 
placing the detection and measurement of the 
motions of stars in the line of sight as among the 
greatest achievements of physical science. Before 
the statement of Doppler's principle, the mere detec- 
tion of such movements must have appeared to be 
beyond the very possibility of human endeavour, at 
any rate without observations extending over many 
thousands of years. From the motion of a star in 
line of sight, its position upon the face of the 
heavens is unaffected. It is true that by the con- 
tinuance of such movement, in the course of time 
a change in the apparent brightness of a star would 
result, as also an alteration of its parallax; but so 
many thousands of years must elapse before either 
would become appreciable to the most refined 
observation, that but little enthusiasm could be 
aroused by the contemplation of the ultimate possi- 
bility of the successful application of either method. 
By the discovery of Huggins, however, an observa- 
tion, demanding, it is true, the utmost delicacy, but 
which need not extend over more than a few 
minutes, has proved sufficient. Again, few dis- 
coveries have furnished a finer illustration of the 
debt that one science so frequently owes to its 
sisters, and of the unexpected nature of the con- 
junction towards which accumulation of knowledge 
is tending. Upon one line we see the story of 
sunlight first roughly sketched in the ray dispersed 
by Newton's prism; told with more detail in the 



212 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

improved conditions of experiment devised by 
Wollaston and Fraunhofer; and again with a still 
fuller meaning in the shrewd conjectures of Stokes 
and in the experiments of Kirchhoff. Upon a 
converging line we trace the first conception of the 
wave theory of light in the genius of Huygens, 
and, after a century of neglect, its restoration and 
establishment upon a firm foundation by Young. 
Anon comes Doppler still discovering, though 
mistaken as to the exact course he was directing; 
then the direction of the course towards its proper 
goal by Fizeau ; and, later, its magnificent attain- 
ment in the experimental skill of Sir William 
Huggins. 

In 1870, two years after Huggins's discovery, Dr. 
Hermann Vogel, who then had charge of a private 
observatory at Bothcamp, was attracted to the 
measurement of stellar motions in the line of sight. 
For four years at Bothcamp, and for a further 
period of thirteen years at Potsdam, where he be- 
came possessed of instrumental means of greater 
power, Vogel carried out measurements upon 
practically the same method as that originally 
adopted by Huggins. In 1887, however, by which 
time the photographic gelatine dry plate first in- 
troduced by Mr. Kennet in 1876 had reached a 
high degree of perfection, and had been introduced 
with remarkable success in other branches of 
astronomy, Vogel applied it to the purpose of his 
work, and soon became convinced, that, by photo- 
graphing the spectrum of a star together with the 
bright lines of glowing hydrogen or some other 



The Analysis of Starlight. 213 

terrestrial vapour introduced for the purpose of 
exact comparison, and by subjecting the com- 
pound spectrum so photographed to microscopic 
examination, a far higher degree of accuracy could 
be attained than was possible in visual observation. 
From that date to the year 1891 the photographic 
method was consistently followed at Potsdam, and 
from the consistency between independent observa- 
tions of the same star at different times there can be 
no hesitation in regarding the results as constituting 
the most exact record that has so far been acquired 
of the motions of stars in the line of sight. The 
speeds of approach and recession of the following 
eight more familiar stars are taken from Vogel's 
results, the velocities being given in miles per 
second. Due allowance has been made in every 
instance for the direction of the speed of the Earth 
in its orbit 18*7 miles per second at the time of 
observation, so that the numbers are actually the 
velocities of the stars relatively to the Sun. So far, 
no star has been found to possess a higher velocity 
in the line of sight than Aldebaran. 

VELOCITIES OF APPROACH AND RECESSION OF STARS 
(Miles per second). 

Approaching Stars. j Receding Stars. 

Sirius, 9-8 ! Aldebaran, 30-2 

The Pole Star, ... i6'i , Rigel, 10-2 

Arcturus, 4*8 | Capella, 15*2 

Vega, 9'5 , Betelgeux, 107 

It was during the course of these observations 
that the last step was taken in the demonstration of 
the existence of the dark companion of Algol. The 



2i4 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

essential principles other than the spectroscopic 
ones that underlie the investigation have already 
been given in an earlier chapter, 1 and the reader 
will now have no difficulty in completing the story 
of the discovery. It had been shown to follow from 
the laws of motion that, if the regular and con- 
tinually repeated fading observed in the light of 
Algol were due, as was strongly suspected, to its 
periodic eclipse by a dark star revolving round it 
in an orbit presented edgeways to the Earth, Algol 
itself should be in revolution in a similar orbit, and 
in the same plane, and should therefore during each 
revolution alternately approach and recede from the 
Earth. Such approach and recession should pro- 
duce an oscillation of the dark lines in the spectrum 
of the star, as they became by Doppler's principle 
displaced higher and lower in the spectrum, and 
precisely such an oscillation of the lines as was 
demanded by theory was actually detected in twelve 
photographs of the spectrum of Algol taken at 
intervals between 1889 and 1891. 

An oscillation of spectral lines precisely similar 
to that presented by Algol was discovered during 
the same period in Spica, the most brilliant star in 
the constellation of the Virgin. In this case the 
complete oscillation was effected in just over four 
days, and the orbital speed of the star indicated by 
the displacement of its spectral lines is 56-7 miles 
per second. It can, therefore, scarcely be doubted 
that, like Algol, Spica is accompanied by a dark 
companion, but that the plane of its orbit is inclined 

1 See pp. 22-31. 



The Analysis of Starlight. 215 

to the line of sight to such an extent that, at each 
conjunction, the dark star passes either just over 
or under it, thus avoiding an eclipse. Vogel is 
indeed of opinion that faint traces of the spectrum 
of the companion can be detected in the photo- 
graphs. 

While these refined observations were in pro- 
gress at Potsdam, a very beautiful application of 
Doppler's principle was effected at the observatory 
of Harvard in the United States. From 1886 to 
1890 the energy of Professor E. C. Pickering and 
his assistants was mainly directed to effecting a 
photographic record of the spectra of stars as far as 
the eighth magnitude. The method adopted con- 
sisted in accurately adjusting a photographic plate 
at the principal focus of the object-glass of a tele- 
scope, while immediately in front of the object- 
glass, a large prism known as an objective prism 
was fixed. In the absence of the prism the 
sensibly parallel rays of a star would have been 
condensed into a point-like image upon the plate, 
but by the prism the image was elongated into a 
spectral line. The method so far was, as we have 
seen, that devised by Fraunhofer, who expanded 
the spectral line into a band of sensible width by a 
cylindrical lens. In the work at Harvard, however, 
no cylindrical lens was employed. The line was 
directly photographed, but, by causing the tele- 
scope to slowly move relatively to the star so that 
the spectral line drifted in a direction at right angles 
to its length over the plate a band was produced in 
which the dark lines were distinctly visible. All 



216 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

stars included within a certain small area of the 
heavens toward which the instrument was directed 
formed images, and therefore spectra, upon the 
plate, which therefore frequently contained a con- 
siderable number of stellar spectra. The method 
was inferior to that followed at Potsdam in that, in 
the necessary absence of a comparison spectrum 
from the plate, it was impossible to determine the 
absolute positions of lines in their respective spectra 
with great accuracy, such, for instance, as would 
have been essential to the detection of motion in the 
line of sight, but it enabled a far greater number of 
stars to be examined in the time, the spectra of over 
ten thousand being in fact photographed and ex- 
amined in four years. Upon examining several 
photographs of the spectrum of Mizar, the middle 
star of the three forming the handle of the 
" Plough" or the tail of the " Great Bear", the 
singular fact appeared that while upon some plates 
the dark lines presented a normal appearance, on 
others they were doubled ; and upon a more critical 
examination it appeared that they opened and 
closed with perfect regularity in successive periods 
of fifty-two days. A simple and complete explana- 
tion of these appearances is found in the assumption 
that we are here presented with a system of two 
stars, similar to that of Algol and its companion, 
except that in the case of Mizar both of the stars are 
bright. The actual photographed spectrum would 
therefore be a combination of the spectra of the two 
stars. The pair being in continual revolution 
round their common centre of mass, at the instant 



The Analysis of Starlight. 217 

of their conjunction with the direction of the Earth 
they would be drifting across the line of sight 
in opposite directions; neither would be ap- 
proaching or receding; the spectral lines of both, 
being in their normal positions, would coincide; 
and the appearance of a single spectrum would 
result. A quarter of the complete period of revolu- 
tion later, however, one of the stars would be rush- 
ing towards and the other from the Earth, their 
lines would consequently experience displacement 
in opposite directions in their spectra, and would 
appear as separated. In another quarter period 
half a revolution would have been accomplished 
from the time of the first observation, conjunction 
with the Earth would again occur, and the com- 
bined spectrum would once more assume its normal 
appearance. There can be little hesitation in 
accepting this explanation. 

From the impracticability of determining the 
exact positions of the lines in the spectrum it was 
not possible to form an estimate of the actual speeds 
of the component stars in the line of sight, but, from 
the widest distance to which the lines open out it is 
a simple matter to determine for the instant of their 
greatest separation the speed of one star relatively 
to the other in the line of sight. It appeared to be 
about 100 miles per second. If we assume that the 
orbits are presented edgewise to the Earth, the 
movement of the stars at the time of the widest 
separation of their spectral lines would be directly 
towards and away from the Earth, and this velocity 
would be the actual speed of one star relatively to 



2i8 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

the other. From the knowledge of this relative 
velocity, and of the complete period of revolution 
in this case 104 days it is possible from the laws of 
mechanics and gravitation to calculate the combined 
mass of the stars. In the result a mass is indicated 
of forty times that of the Sun. If the orbits are 
merely inclined to the direction of the Earth and are 
not presented edgewise, the actual relative speeds, 
being at the time of greatest separation of the lines 
only in part directed to the Earth, must be greater 
than those assumed, and the masses of the stars 
must exceed the value deduced from the first 
assumptions. Since there are no means of deter- 
mining the inclination of the orbits to the line of 
sight, it becomes therefore only possible to deter- 
mine a limit above which the mass of the double 
star must He. 

From the spectroscopic examination of an object 
so remote that its distance is incapable of determin- 
ation, and that in the field of view of the most 
powerful telescope appears but as an absolute point 
of light, to see a pair of revolving suns; to measure 
the period of their mutual revolution ; to trace over 
their blazing surfaces cooler atmospheres, and in 
these to recognize gases familiar upon the surface 
of the Earth ; and to assign a minimum limit to the 
mass of the entire system, is an achievement that 
can scarcely fail to appeal even to those many and 
most hardened of sinners against intellectual light 
who would value scientific investigation only in 
exact proportion to the monetary equivalent of its 
technical application. 



The Red Flames of the Sun. 219 

Chapter VI. 
The Red Flames of the Sun. 

We have traced in a previous chapter the course 
of discovery resulting from the spectroscopic exam- 
ination of the general light of the Sun. From 
the time of Fraunhofer's observations to those of 
Angstrom, the light submitted to examination was 
indeed that of the Sun, but it is important to notice 
that no pains had been taken to differentiate the 
radiations thrown off by different parts of the Sun's 
surface. From the centre, as well as from the edge 
of the disc ; from the dark spots and brilliant faculae, 
as well as from the delicate extensions of its atmos- 
pheric surroundings, only so far recognized during 
the brief moments of totality of solar eclipse ; rays 
entered the spectroscope and mingled their story in 
the resulting spectrum. In 1866, however, Ang- 
strom for the first time adopted a different method, 
one by which it became possible to examine in 
detail the radiations of different parts of the Sun's 
surface, and which has during the years that have 
followed yielded a veritable harvest of interesting 
and valuable results. It will only be possible in 
the present chapter to pass under review very briefly 
a few of the more remarkable of these in their bear- 
ing upon the Physics of the Sun. 

Angstrom's device consisted in forming, by means 
of a convex lens, a sharply-defined image or picture 
of the Sun upon the slit-plate of a spectroscope. 



220 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

The result is generally and most conveniently 
obtained by adjusting a spectroscope so that its 
collimator lies along the axis of an astronomical 
telescope, and so that its slit-plate is removed from 
the object-glass by a distance equal to its focal 
length. Under these conditions, and when the 
telescope is directed towards the Sun, the rays from 
different portions of the Sun's surface are focussed 
at corresponding points upon the plate, and there 
is formed upon it a perfectly-defined picture of the 
solar disc, in which the sun-spots are clearly visible. 
The size of the image is, by elementary optical 
laws, in direct proportion to the focal length of the 
lens forming it, a picture of the Sun an inch in 
diameter necessitating a focal length of about 9 
feet. To observe the spectrum of any selected por- 
tion of the Sun's surface, the slit is so adjusted that 
the image of that particular portion falls upon it. 
Under these conditions, the converged rays from the 
selected region of the Sun, instead of illuminating 
the plate, pass directly through the opening of the 
slit, and travelling through the spectroscope, are 
subjected to analysis. It will be noticed that the 
method is essentially the same as that applied by 
Huggins two years earlier to the examination of 
the spectra of nebulas. It had also been employed 
by Donati in 1864 for the purpose of examining the 
spectrum of a comet. 

It is important to observe that different portions 
of the length of the slit being illuminated by differ- 
ent parts of the Sun's surface, the light filling it 
may, and indeed frequently does, differ in quality 



The Red Flames of the Sun. 221 

in different parts of its length. As in the resulting 
spectrum the light from each small part of the slit 
is spread out into a spectral band, the appearance 
is produced of the several and frequently differing 
spectra of those portions of the Sun's surface by 
which the slit is illuminated arranged as a series of 
parallel strips, each being in contact with those 
immediately above and below it. 

In 1868 the new method was applied to the study 
of the " red flames " or " prominences " of the Sun. 
At a total eclipse of the Sun, during the few minutes 
at most in which the glowing photosphere is covered 
by the Moon, there are seen, apparently projecting 
from behind the dark disc of the Moon, the delicate 
appendages of the Sun known as the "promin- 
ences" and the "corona". The corona appears as 
an exquisitely beautiful and generally irregular halo 
of silvery light surrounding the black circle of the 
Moon. It is full of the most delicate detail, and 
appears to the eye to consist chiefly of streamers, 
some of which frequently extend from the surface 
of the Sun to a distance greater than its diameter. 
The far smaller but more brilliant "prominences" 
are rose-tinted projections that frequently assume 
the most fantastic forms, and occasionally extend 
to a height of a quarter of the Sun's diameter from 
its surface. Though at one time generally regarded 
as belonging to the Moon, the prominences had 
for some years been recognized as of solar origin, 
from the fact that during the progress of an eclipse, 
the dark disc of the Moon had been seen to travel 
over them, gradually covering those in front, and 



222 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

at the same time unveiling those behind the direc- 
tion of its motion. A sufficient explanation of their 
invisibility upon the limb of the uneclipsed Sun, 
even when viewed with the telescope, is that their 
fainter light is entirely overwhelmed by the far 
more brilliant illumination of the Earth's atmos- 
phere produced by the direct solar rays. 

In 1868 there occurred an eclipse of the Sun in 
which the track of the Moon's shadow travelled 
across India. It was observed from several stations 
situated at different points of the shadow's path by 
scientific men collected from all parts of the civilized 
world, and among them the French astronomer 
M. Janssen, who had made special arrangements 
to examine the spectrum of the prominences. As 
they flashed out at the instant of totality, Janssen 
rapidly brought the slit of his spectroscope across 
the telescopic image of one of the finest, and, on 
applying his eye to the instrument, perceived at 
once a number of bright separated lines, the certain 
indication of gaseous constitution. But this was 
not all. Janssen was so impressed with the extreme 
brightness of the lines, that, as the prominences 
themselves melted from view in the reappearing 
sunlight, he perceived the possibility of recognizing 
them on the edge of the uneclipsed Sun. Clouds 
prevented him from attempting the observation 
during the remainder of that day, but on the follow- 
ing morning, not long after sunrise, Janssen care- 
fully searched the immediate neighbourhood of 
the Sun's limb with the spectroscope, and had no 
difficulty in again recognizing the brilliant lines of 



The Red Flames of the Sun. 



223 



the spectra of prominences entirely invisible in the 
telescopic view of the Sun. 

The principle underlying this discovery, a dis- 
covery that initiated an entirely new application of 
the spectroscope, is extremely beautiful, as well as 
simple. The atmospheric glare in the direction of 
the Sun, by which the prominences are usually con- 
cealed, is scattered sunlight, and as such, yields the 
ordinary solar spectrum. The amount of light dis- 
tributed over the whole of this spectrum is derived 
from that entering the slit, so that the intensity ot 
illumination, or brightness, of the spectrum becomes 
less and less in direct proportion to its extension in 
length, and must continue to do so until the dis- 
persion becomes so great that the spectrum, ceasing 
to be continuous, breaks up into a number of separ- 
ate images of the slit. We have seen, however, 
that with sunlight this has never been effected. 
Since, by the employment of a number of prisms, 
through all of which the light is transmitted in suc- 
cession, any required degree of spectral extension 
may be obtained, the brightness of the spectrum 
may by the same means be reduced to any required 
extent. With the prominences, however, this is not 
the case. From the fact of their being gaseous, their 
light consists of a finite number of, and practically 
of a very few, pure colours. The first separation of 
these in the spectroscope is, of course, accompanied 
by a decrease in brightness, but since the colours 
are now pure, they are not further enfeebled to 
whatever extent the spectrum is extended ; the only 
effect of such extension being to place them farther 



224 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

apart. We have then the general result, that the 
brightness of the spectrum of the prominences is 
only slightly, and to a limited degree, enfeebled by 
spectral extension; whereas the spectrum of the 
atmospheric glare is enfeebled without limit in 
direct proportion to spectral extension or dispersion. 
After a certain dispersion, therefore, the general 
illumination of the greatly weakened spectrum of the 
air glare is no longer sufficiently bright to conceal 
the scarcely reduced light of the spectrum of the 
prominences, and their bright lines become visible 
upon the background of the enfeebled spectrum of 
the sunlight scattered in the Earth's atmosphere. 

Previously to Janssen's discovery, however, the 
principle by which it was effected had been clearly 
recognized by the English astronomers. It had 
been plainly stated in 1866 by Sir Norman Lockyer, 
who, at the time of the eclipse, had a powerful spec- 
troscope in process of construction for the purpose 
of attempting its application. The instrument was 
completed shortly afterwards; and, by its means, 
Lockyer detected the spectra of prominences before 
the news of Janssen's success had reached Eng- 
land. Sir William Huggins had, moreover, already 
searched the limb of the Sun for spectra of promi- 
nences with a spectroscope of moderate power, 
though without success. Upon the announcement 
of the discovery, however, he repeated the obser- 
vations with the same instrument; and, now that 
he was aware of the exact part of the spectrum 
toward which to direct his attention, had no diffi- 
culty in recognizing the bright lines. 



The Red Flames of the Sun. 225 

The bright lines of the spectra of prominences 
had been observed by several astronomers in India 
during the progress of the eclipse. Although other 
fainter lines had appeared, one observer having 
indeed detected as many as nine, by far the most 
conspicuous were three a crimson, a green, and a 
yellow. The duration of the eclipse had been too 
brief to allow of an accurate determination of the 
positions of the lines, but it was believed from their 
general appearance that the red and green would 
be found to be due to the radiations of hydrogen, 
and the yellow to those of sodium. On subse- 
quently examining the spectra of prominences at 
leisure in the uneclipsed Sun, the coincidences of 
the red and green lines with those of glowing 
hydrogen were established, but the yellow line was 
found to be rather more refrangible than the yellow 
of sodium, and not to correspond in position with 
any line that had so far been recognized in the 
spectrum of a terrestrial gas. It was consequently 
assumed to arise from the radiations of a gaseous 
constituent of the prominences unfamiliar to terres- 
trial chemistry. Later, this hypothetical gas re- 
ceived, at the suggestion of Frankland, the name 
of helium. For a long time subsequently, helium 
remained unrecognized, save as a constituent of the 
Sun, stars, and nebulas, until, in 1895, it was dis- 
covered by Professor William Ramsay among the 
gases extracted from a terrestrial mineral, clevite. 

For some days after the eclipse Janssen remained 
at his station in India, fascinated with the applica- 
tion of the new discovery. He soon found that the 

(M520) P 



226 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

bright lines originally seen in the spectra of pro- 
minences could be traced, though to a far less 
distance from it, round the entire limb of the Sun. 
There could be no hesitation in ascribing their 
continual appearance to the radiations of the in- 
candescent atmosphere of the Sun, and it con- 
sequently appeared that the prominences were 
essentially enormous and local extensions of the 
solar atmosphere. Janssen also found that the pro- 
minences were essentially unstable, and that they 
were subject to changes upon the most stupendous 
scale. During the eclipse an enormous red flame, 
estimated as being at least 89,000 miles in height, 
had been directly seen upon the edge of the Sun : 
but, upon the following day, scarcely a trace of 
bright lines could be detected by the spectroscope 
in the place that it had occupied. From day to 
day Janssen traced, from the occurrence and the 
varying distance to which they could be followed 
from its limb, the mighty surging now recognized 
for the first time in the atmosphere of the Sun. 

In this, the earliest method of studying pro- 
minences upon the limb of the uneclipsed Sun, 
observation was confined to a narrow section of 
the prominence the image of which was at that 
instant formed upon the slit of the spectroscope. 
It was possible, however, from the examination 
of a number of such sections, to trace the complete 
form of the prominence. For this purpose it 
was most convenient to adjust the slit so that it 
lay "radially", or at right angles to the edge 
of the solar image formed upon the slit plate, 



The Red Flames of the Sun. 227 

and so that a small portion of it penetrated the 
image itself. The appearance in the spectroscope 
then consisted of the ordinary solar spectrum of 
that portion of its surface that illuminated part of 
the slit, while above it was extended the bright- 
line spectrum of the solar atmosphere and pro- 
minences, the length of the lines depending upon 
the extension of the radiating gases above the solar 
surface. By moving the spectroscope so that the 
slit travelled round the solar image while always 
maintaining its radial position with reference to it, 
the bright lines were seen to contract or extend as 
the level of the atmosphere and prominences rose 
and fell. From measurements of the lengths of the 
lines, it therefore became possible to trace the 
varying height of the incandescent gases produc- 
ing them, and thus to construct the complete out- 
line of a prominence. 

In the early part of the following year a further 
simplicity was effected in the observation of pro- 
minences. In 1869 Sir William Huggins, having 
by its spectrum detected a prominence upon the 
limb of the Sun, carefully adjusted the slit so as to 
lie within the image of the prominence but just 
outside of that of the Sun. He then boldly opened 
the slit, and saw, not the line spectrum of the pro- 
minence, but, in the position where its red line had 
appeared, the prominence itself, splendidly dis- 
played as a cloud of crimson fire. 

The explanation of this very beautiful discovery 
is again extremely simple. The opened slit may 
be regarded as a narrow window directed towards 



228 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

the prominence. The light of the sky entering the 
window along with that of the prominence, is 
spread out into a very impure spectrum, which, 
retaining its continuous character, is greatly en- 
feebled in brightness by its extension. The pro- 
minence light, however, consisting almost entirely 
of three pure colours, is at once resolved, but is 
not further weakened. The crimson rays of the 
prominence are deflected in block by the prism, 
and, being scarcely reduced in intensity, convey to 
the eye the appearance of a crimson prominence 
superposed upon the enfeebled crimson of the spec- 
trum of the atmospheric glare. In a similar man- 
ner, a green picture of the prominence is produced 
by its green rays, and appears upon the green 
region of the air spectrum, while each pure colour 
present in the radiations of the prominences must, 
in like manner, develop a picture of the prominence 
in its own colour. Until very recently this con- 
stituted the most powerful method for studying the 
varying forms of the prominences. From the 
great visual intensity of the crimson light, the 
picture formed by it has been the one generally 
selected for observation. 

The picture presented by solar prominences, 
when viewed with fine instrumental means, is of 
such extreme beauty as to lend a special charm to 
their study. As was first indicated by Lockyer in 
1870, they appear to be divisible into two distinct 
classes. Those of the first, which are generally 
known as quiescent, are commonly the larger. In 
appearance they closely resemble terrestrial clouds 



The Red Flames of the Sun. 229 

bathed in the crimson glory of sunset. Their soft 
outlines experiencing but gradual change, they 
seem to float, often for days together, at a great 
elevation above the glowing surface of the Sun, 
being sometimes connected with it by delicate 
filaments of light, but at other times entirely sepa- 
rated from it. They are to be traced round the 
entire limb of the Sun, and appear to have no 
direct relation to sun-spots. The spectroscope 
shows their light to consist almost entirely of the 
radiations of hydrogen and helium. 

The prominences of the second class, which are 
known as eruptive, appear, as their name implies, 
to be the results of veritable explosions from be- 
neath the cloud-surface of the photosphere. They 
are intensely brilliant. They are subject to the 
most violent and rapid changes, and are short- 
lived. Their spectra indicate, that, while their light 
is, in the main, due to the glowing hydrogen and 
helium, the vapours of other metals, and conspicu- 
ously those of sodium, magnesium, and iron, are 
generally present in them. They are clearly con- 
nected with the unrecognized physical cause to 
which sun-spots are due, for they are most densely 
distributed over the zones on either side of the Sun's 
equator to which spots are almost entirely limited; 
they appear in greatest abundance at the approxi- 
mately regular periods of eleven years that mark 
the maximum richness of spot distribution ; and, in 
several instances, they have been seen in direct con- 
nection with large spots, that have, by the slow 
rotation of the Sun, just reached the edge of the 



230 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

disc. When it has been possible to trace the con- 
nection most exactly, their glowing matter has 
appeared to have been projected from the edges of 
spots, and later, in its descent, to have fallen 
towards their dark and probably depressed centres. 
Violent commotions, evidenced by rapid changes 
in appearance, are invariably associated with pro- 
minences of the eruptive class, but they have 
been, from the first days of prominence study, re- 
cognized in another manner. The spectrum of a 
prominence is usually observed with the slit, which 
is now very narrow, lying radially across the limb 
of the Sun's image. With such an arrangement 
the bright lines of the prominence spectrum seem, 
under normal conditions, to be the continuations 
of the corresponding dark Fraunhofer lines in the 
solar spectrum appearing immediately below and 
in contact with them. Frequently, however, this 
coincidence is not maintained, a prominence line 
appearing to be displaced to one side or the 
other of the position of the corresponding Fraun- 
hofer line, while occasionally displacements in 
different directions are observed as the slit is ad- 
justed to different parts of the image of the same 
prominence. The reader will have no hesitation in 
assigning these displacements to their true cause 
to a Doppler effect, due to the rush of glowing pro- 
minence matter either directly from or towards the 
observer. In this manner velocities in the line of 
sight have been recognized of from 200 to 300 
miles a second, a velocity upon much the same 
scale as that traced across the direction of vision 



The Red Flames of the Sun. 231 

by the rapidity of changes in prominence forms. 
From the detailed method of observation, however, 
spectral changes, due to movement in the line of 
sight, are now more complicated and fuller of 
meaning. Since different parts of the slit are 
illuminated by light from different regions of a 
prominence, and as each element of length of the 
slit gives rise to a correspondingly narrow strip of 
the spectrum, it frequently happens that, in different 
parts of its length, a bright line displays different 
displacements, due to differing velocities in the line 
of sight in the corresponding regions of the pro- 
minence. Thus, one part of a line may be dis- 
placed to the red, while another is displaced to the 
violet, and the whole line not unfrequently assumes 
a curiously curved and irregular form. It is clear 
that, from the study of these contorted lines, the 
motion of the glowing matter in the line of sight 
may be determined at different levels of the pro- 
minence. 

For twenty-two years the method discovered by 
Huggins for observing prominences remained 
supreme. In 1891, however, Professor Hale of 
Chicago devised an extremely beautiful instrument, 
which he has termed the spectro-heliograph, by 
which it has now become possible to record their 
pictures by photography in a far more expeditious 
and perfect manner. The principle of the spectro- 
heliograph is as follows. Although, in the total 
quantity of their light, the prominences are so 
much less brilliant than the glare produced by 
the Sun's rays in the atmosphere of the Earth, 



232 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

that they are, excepting when the Sun is totally 
eclipsed, permanently invisible ; yet, in their 
special radiations, they are so much brighter, 
that, when observed under such conditions that 
attention is only directed to these, they become 
clearly visible. Professor Hale's method consists 
essentially in photographing the Sun and its 
immediate surroundings by light of one colour 
only, selecting as that colour one especially strongly 
represented in the radiations of prominences. The 
prominence ray that appeals most powerfully to the 
eye is, as we have seen, the crimson light of hydro- 
gen; but this is quite unsuitable for the purpose 
of photography, since it produces no effect upon the 
ordinary photographic plate, and those plates that 
are specially prepared so as to be affected by it are 
very slow in their action. The more refrangible 
green light of hydrogen might conceivably be 
employed ; but, still better than either of these, are 
either of two deep violet rays present in all promin- 
ence radiations, and corresponding in their positions 
in the spectrum with the two broad dark Fraun- 
hofer bands H and K that lie almost at the violet 
extremity of the visible spectrum. Owing to the 
extreme position of these rays in the spectrum they 
scarcely affect the eye, and for this reason would be 
entirely unsuitable for visual observation, but they 
are extremely energetic in their action upon the 
photographic plate. Their radiations are, as we 
have already seen, due to the incandescent vapour 
of calcium. Although always present in the light 
of prominences, owing to the feebleness of their 



The Red Flames of the Sun. 233 

visual effect they remained undiscovered until 
1882, when they were recognized in photographs of 
the spectra of prominences seen upon the edge of 
the dark moon during the famous total solar eclipse 
of that year. Although the dark bands H and K are 
very broad, the corresponding violet lines of the 
prominence spectra are fine; hence there is this 
further advantage in making use of them, that, 
since the colours immediately next them in the 
spectrum of sunlight are absent or weakly repre- 
sented, they are more easily isolated for the pur- 
poses of experiment. In practical work it has been 
found most convenient to make use of the violet 
line that corresponds with K. 

In photographing prominences with the spec- 
tro-heliograph, an image of the Sun is formed by 
the object-glass of a telescope upon the slit plate 
of a spectroscope in the usual manner, the image 
being, in the apparatus actually employed, about 
2 inches in diameter. The extremely narrow slit, 
which is somewhat longer than this, lies right 
across the picture, and is therefore illuminated by 
light from a narrow strip of the Sun and its at- 
mospheric surroundings on either side. The 
spectrum is focussed upon a small screen which 
forms a part of the instrument, and it of course 
consists of a succession of images of the slit, one 
formed by each colour present in the light that 
penetrates it. In the screen there is a second slit, 
and this is carefully adjusted so as to be in the 
exact position of the bright K line. The violet K 
light, therefore, and that only, penetrates the second 



234 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

slit, and forms an image of the first upon a photo- 
graphic plate that is placed immediately beyond. 
There being formed upon the surface of the plate 
an exact picture of the illuminated slit, so far as its 
K radiation is concerned, the picture of the slice of 
the Sun, the image of which is focussed upon the 
slit, is therefore reproduced by these rays. By the 
regular action of a water-clock, the slit of the 
spectroscope is now made to travel across the image 
of the Sun, thus successively including images of 
all portions of its surface, while, by a proper 
mechanism, at the same time, and with such a 
perfectly sympathetic movement that the K line of 
the moving spectrum continually coincides in posi- 
tion with the second slit, the screen in front of the 
photographic plate is carried over it. Adjacent 
pictures of adjacent strips of the Sun are therefore 
photographed by K light, and thus, in the result, a 
complete picture of the Sun is produced, while the 
prominences are so rich in K rays that they appear 
beautifully defined upon it. The passage of the slit 
over the whole image of the Sun occupies but a 
fraction of a minute, in which time a survey is 
effected that would occupy an observer several 
hours to complete less perfectly by visual observa- 
tion. 

Professor Hale's method is invaluable in recording 
not only prominences, but other features of the solar 
surface to which we have not as yet referred. Near 
the limb of the Sun, and most richly displayed in 
the neighbourhood of sun-spots, there are always 
visible in telescopic observation irregular bright 



The Red Flames of the Sun. 235 

masses, commonly forming a rough network over 
the surface. The visibility of these masses, which 
have received the name of " faculag ", near the limb, 
combined with the fact of their disappearance as they 
are carried by the rotation of the Sun farther on to 
its disc, is satisfactorily explained by the assumption 
that they are not appreciably brighter than the clouds 
of the photosphere, but that they float at a higher 
level. The brightness of the solar disc is readily 
seen through a telescope to diminish towards the 
limb, a consequence of absorption exercised upon its 
light by its atmosphere, the absorption being spe- 
cially pronounced in rays coming from the limb to 
the eye, by reason of their oblique passage through 
the atmosphere, and the consequent great length of 
their path involved in it. The faculag being at a 
higher level than the general surface, their light 
does not experience the effects of absorption in so 
marked a manner, and when near the limb they 
therefore become visible upon the background of 
the dimmed photosphere. 

In 1872 Professor Young of New Jersey observed, 
that, in the spectra of faculas, fine bright lines always 
appeared down the centres of the broad bands H 
and K. The appearance probably indicates that the 
faculae contain the incandescent vapour of calcium 
at a lower density but at a higher temperature than 
the same vapour that, in the atmosphere at a lower 
level, produces by its absorption of the light of the 
photosphere the bands H and K. According to this 
view, the light of the photosphere is robbed of the 
H and K radiations while traversing the cool and 



236 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 

dense mass of calcium vapour lying immediately 
above it; at a still greater height more intensely 
heated clouds of the same vapour in part restore the 
rays, but the glowing matter being now at a lower 
density, the light is more truly monochromatic, and 
narrower spectral lines are the result. If, therefore, 
it were possible to view the Sun by its K light, and 
that alone, we should in all probability be able to 
distinguish the faculas not only near the limb but 
over the whole disc; and the method applied by 
Janssen to the prominences would probably be suc- 
cessful but for the fact that these extreme violet 
radiations affect the eye to so slight an extent. The 
photographs of the spectro-heliograph are, however, 
entirely taken by K radiation, and it is not therefore 
surprising to find in them representations of faculae 
over the entire picture of the Sun. It should be 
added, that when it is desired to photograph the 
faculae the operation is carried out precisely in the 
manner described, but that in photographing the 
more delicate prominences upon the limb, it is better 
to exclude the light of the photosphere by covering 
its image by a circular disc. In the resulting pic- 
ture the Sun consequently appears black, and the 
whole strikingly resembles a photograph of the 
eclipsed Sun. 

In our brief study of the work of the spectroscope 
we have but touched upon those of its applications 
that have so far proved the most important, probably 
because it has been found possible to interpret them. 
It has been necessary to pass over a vast accumula- 
tion of its records, in some of which a meaning is 



The Red Flames of the Sun. 237 

indicated with less certainty, but which, in greater 
part, have utterly baffled rational conjecture. It 
cannot be imagined, however, for a moment that the 
story of the spectroscope is as a tale that is told. 
Year by year its record is accumulating, while year 
by year advance in other branches of physical science 
aids in the task of dealing effectively with it. The 
story of its work during the past fifty years is, how- 
ever, alone a noble record of scientific achievement ; 
and it is with feelings of highest interest and keenest 
expectation that the astronomer is now watching its 
continual development. But the path that we have 
followed with some care is one only of a number 
along which knowledge is advancing with no less 
success and promise of future triumph. At the close 
of the nineteenth century as never before does the 
music of Nature resound with a soul-inspiring har- 
mony, and never in the past have the paths of science 
appeared so exquisitely attractive to her children. 



Index. 



Aberration of light, 50, 51. 
Absorption, mechanism of, 177. 
Algol, discovery of dark companion, 

22, 213. 

Alpha Centauri, distance of, 6. 
Alpha Crucis, relation to Milky Way, 

go. 
Alpha Cygni, relation to Milky Way, 

86. 
Andrews, critical temperature of 

gases, 37. 

Andromeda, nebula in, 16. 
Angstrom, explanation of dark lines 

in solar spectrum, 179; method of 

observing spectrum of Sun, 219; 

researches on chemistry of the 

Sun, 1 86. 
Arcturus, motion of, 46, 70. 

Barnard, observations of Mars, 120, 

121, 129; photographs of the 

Milky Way, 66, 67. 
Becquerel, photographs ultra-violet 

region of spectrum, 167. 
Bessel, first detects parallax of a 

star, 5, 50. 

Bifurcation of Milky Way, 60. 
Boeddicker, drawing of the Milky 

Way as seen by the naked eye, 

89, 131- 

Break in the Milky Way, 62. 
Brewster, discovers telluric lines in 

solar spectrum, 166. 
Bunsen and Kirchhoff, researches 

in spectrum analysis, 180. 

Calcium, incandescent vapour of, in 



faculae, 235; variation of spectrum 
under differentphysical conditions, 
190. 

Carbon, discovery of vapour in at- 
mosphere of Sun, 187. 

Carbonic acid gas, suggested as a 
constituent of atmosphereof Mars, 
142. 

Clustering of stars in neighbourhood 
of Sun, 97. 

Coal Sack, in Milky Way, 61, 76, 
81, 83, 89. 

Collisions between stars, 45, 48. 

Colour, effect of motion of source 
upon, 29. 

Colour, relation to length and fre- 
quency of ether waves, 173, 175. 

Copernicus, his view regarding the 
nature of the stars, a. 

Corona, 221 ; drawings of, 131. 

Daguerre, his discoveries in photo- 
graphy, 167. 

Dark matter in space, possible exis- 
tence of, 13, 32, 67. 

Dark stars, 13, 32; possibility of 
detection, 22, 35. 

Diffraction grating, 160. 

Doppler, enunciation of principle 
regarding the effect of motion of 
source on generated waves, 29, 
200. 

Doppler's principle, application to 
the discovery of Algol's com- 
panion, 29. 

Douglass, his observations of Mars, 

I2O, 126. 



240 



Recent Advances in Astronomy. 



Draper, photographs infra-red region 
of spectrum, 168; photographs the 
Moon, 167. 

Earth, appearance of, as seen from 

a planet, 114. 
Eclipse of 1868, 222. 
Energy, conservation of, 45. 
Ether of space, 172. 

Faculae, solar, 234, 235. 

Fizeau, indicates correct application 
of Doppler's principle, 29, 206. 

Foucault, observes absorption of D 
light by gases of electric arc, 
168, 170. 

Fraunhofer, his improvements in the 
spectroscope, 156; observes dark 
lines in spectra of stars, 157; 
observes dark lines in spectrum of 
Sun, 156. 

Fraunhofer lines, first observed by 
Wollaston, 155; studied by Fraun- 
hofer, 156. 

Gamma Cygni, relation to Milky 

Way, 87. 
Goodricke, suggests eclipse theory 

of Algol, 23. 
Groombridge 1830, 46, 99. 

Hale, photographs prominences and 
faculae in uneclipsed Sun, 232. 

Heliometer, 54. 

Helium, discovered in clevite by 
Ramsay, 225 ; a constituent of 
some nebulae, 200; in solar atmo- 
sphere and prominences, 225. 

Henderson, detects parallax of alpha 
Centauri, 6. 

Herschel, Sir John, his drawing of 
the Eta Argus nebula, 130; his 
views regarding the structure of 
the sidereal system, 80; observes 
the relation between the nebulae 
and Milky Way, 71. 

Herschel, Sir William, observes 



antipathy between nebulae and 
stats, 71; observes relation of 
stars to the Milky Way, 68 ; views 
regarding the structure of the 
system of the stars, 73, 77 ; views 
regarding the Sun, 36. 

Huggins, Sir William, demonstrates 
gaseous nature of certain nebulae, 
21 ; determines motion of stars in 
the line of sight, 30, 206; ob- 
serves variations in the spectrum 
of calcium, 191 ; observes spectra 
of stars, 196 ; observes promi- 
nences in uneclipsed Sun, 227. 

Huygens, enunciates wave theory of 
light, 172. 

Hydrogen, in atmosphere of Sun 
and in solar prominences, 225; 
spectrum of, 186. 

Janssen, observes spectra of promi- 
nences in uneclipsed Sun, 222. 

Keeler, his observations of Mars, 

129. 
Kirchhoff, his researches on the 

chemistry of the Sun, 184; his 

researches in spectrum analysis, 

180. 

Lane's law regarding the variation 

of temperature of a cooling gas, 

38-40- 
Light, possible absorption of, in 

space, 79 ; refraction of, 147 ; wave 

theory of, 172-175. 
Lockyer, Sir Norman, his researches 

in the chemistry of the Sun, 187 ; 

his dissociation hypothesis, 191; 

meteoritic hypothesis, 43 {note). 
Lowell, his observations on Mars, 

166. 

Mars, 101; atmosphere of, no, 113, 
114; canals of, 102, 124, 132; 
climate of, 132, 142; clouds on, 
122 ; dark belt surrounding polar 



Index. 



241 



cap on, 121 ; distance of, 103; 
gravitation on, 103; gray -green 
"seas" on, 117, 120; limb-light 
on, no, 112; " a miniature of the 
Earth", 102; mass of, 103; op- 
positions of, 108; orange con- 
tinents on, 117; phases of, 104; 
polar caps of, 1 16 ; rotation of, 
108 ; seasons on, 109 ; size of, 103 ; 
speculations on possible inhabi- 
tants, 127; telescopic appearance 
of, 108 ; vapour of water in atmo- 
sphere of, 115. 

Milky Way, Barnard's photographs 
of, 66, 67; a collection of faint 
stars, 60 ; dark rifts in, 67, 81 ; a 
definite formation, 64, 82; dis- 
tance of, 62, 92; early views re- 
garding, 59; general appearance 
of, 59 ; lines of stars in, 67 ; nebu- 
lous matter in, 64, 68, 87 ; photo- 
graphs of, 65 ; structure apparent 
in, 63; telescopic appearance of, 
60,64. 

Moon, nature of motion round 
Earth, 25. 

Nebulae, constitution of, 197; de- 
monstration of gaseous nature of, 
19, 197; early conjectures as to 
nature of, 16 ; Herschel's views 
regarding, 16 ; regarded as exter- 
nal galaxies, 18; relation of, to 
Milky Way, 71; temperature of, 
38. 

Newton, Sir Isaac, his analysis of 
sunlight, 144. 

Oppositions of a planet, 104. 
Orion, nebula in, 13 ; star streams 

in, related to Milky Way, 88. 
Oxygen, its apparent absence from 

the atmosphere of the Sun, 192. 

Parallax, method of relative, 3, 52, 
56; of a star, 5, 51, 52. 
(M620) 



Photographs, of infra region of 

spectrum, 168 ; method of taking, 

of celestial objects, 66 ; of Milky 

Way, 66, 67; of spectrum, 167, 

168, 187; of ultra-violet region 

of spectrum, 167. 
Photography, discovery by Da- 

guerre, 167; invention of gelatine 

plate, 212. 

Photosphere, solar, 36. 
Pickering, E. C., his discovery of 

spectroscopic double stars, 215. 
Pickering, W. H., his observations 

of Mars, 121, 126. 
Prism, action of, upon light, 149. 
Proctor, maintains relation of lucid 

stars to Milky Way, 69, 86, 89 ; 

suggests possible structure of 

Milky Way, 83. 
Prominences, solar, 228 ; connection 

with sun-spots, 229. 

Radiation, mechanism of, 176. 

Ramsay, discovers helium, 225. 

Ranyard, maintains intimate rela- 
tion between stars and Milky 
Way, 86. 

Refraction, by atmosphere, 51 ; of 
light, 147. 

Resonance, 177. 

Reversal of spectral lines, first ob- 
served by Foucault, 168. 170 ; 
theory of, enunciated by Stokes, 
171-179. 

Rowland, his photographs of solar 
spectrum, 187. 

Schiaparelli, discovers the canals of 
Mars, 124. 

Selective absorption, 135, 138. 

Simms, applies collimator to spec- 
troscope, 157. 

Sirius, brightness of, 8 ; distance of, 
7 ; motion of, in line of sight, 206, 
209 ; spectrum of, 207. 

Sky, cause of appearance of, no. 
Q 



242 Recent Advances in Astronomy. 



Spectra, conditions of purity of, 152, 
157, 158 ; of flames, 163, 165 ; of 
solar prominences, 222 ; variation 
of, with different physical condi- 
tions, 188; of nebulae, 198; of stars, 
194 ; of Sun, 144. 

Spectro-heliograph, 236. 

Spectroscope, principle of, 153; 
prismatic, 158. 

Stars, death stage of, 22 ; distances 
of, 3-8, 50 ; hypothesis of uniform 
distribution of, in space, 77, 78, 
94, 96; magnitudes of, 92; motion 
of, 45; motion of, in the line of 
sight, 213; relation of, to Milky 
Way, 68, 71, 82, 86, 91, 92, 98; 
spectra of, method of obtaining, 
194; spectroscopic double, 215; 
sun-like nature of, 2, 8. 

Stewart, Balfour, states condition 
necessary for reversal of spectral 
lines, 182. 

Stokes, Sir Gabriel, explains reversal 
of spectral lines, 171-179. 

Struve, Wilhelm, his views on struc- 
ture of sidereal system, 81. 

Sun, death stage of, n ; life history 
of, 42 ; motion of, in space, 47; 
source of heat of, n ; telescopic 
appearance of, 35. 



Sympathetic vibration, 177. 

Telluric lines in solar spectrum, 166. 

Tyndall, his researches on selective 
absorption, 137; illustrates the 
theory of sky formation, no. 

Universe, last catastrophe of, 49. 

Vogel, demonstrates existence of 
dark companion of Algol, 24, 31 ; 
measures motions of stars in the 
line of sight, 212. 

Waters, Sydney, his map of nebulae 
in their relation to Milky Way, 72. 

Waves, formation of, 176 ; of light, 
172-175 ; of sound, 174, 200. 

Wollaston, first observes dark lines 
in solar spectrum, 156; improves 
conditions for viewing spectra, 

I 55- 

Wright, of Durham, his theory re- 
garding the structure of the stellar 
system, 73. 

Young, C. A., observes reversal of 
calcium lines in faculae, 235. 

Young, Thomas, establishes the 
wave theory of light, 172. 



UNIVERSITY of CALIFORNIA 

AT 

LOS ANGELES 
LIBRARY 



QB44 
F54r 
1899 



Bttfrwerlngft 

Math:-, -;, S ! 
Scierv;as 
Library 



QB 






ALJXIUARM 

'TACK 







000210527 8